Mtelecogo en 2

Electrical pre-wiring
Installation • Assembly • Commissioning

•Use • Maintenance • Repair
The smart controller
Technical manual
V101 – 03/2017
MTELecoGO_101_EN
Electrical pre-wiring MP ecoGO
SUMMARY OF MODIFICATIONS IN REGARD WITH THE PREVIOUS VERSION:
MTELecoGO_000_EN
MODIFICATION CONCERNING
INDEX DESCRIPTION OF THE
SECTION MODIFICATION
Physical Functions
Figures Writing
Product Features
The
Update to EN 81-20/50
document
standards
as whole
V101 - 03/2017 2/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

CONTENTS
1 SAFETY INFORMATION ............................................................................................................ 7
1.1 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Use of the MP ecoGO (EPW) installation................................................................................. 7
1.3 Product safety .................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Staff requirements.............................................................................................................. 7
1.5 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 7
1.6 Electric power risks. Residual voltage .................................................................................... 7
1.7 Modifications and operations on MP ecoGO EPW ..................................................................... 8
1.8 Obligations of the Installer / Maintenance staff ....................................................................... 8
2 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE EPW MP ecoGO .............................................................. 9
2.1 General features................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Performances of the EPW MP ecoGO ..................................................................................... 9
2.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 9
2.2.2 Main performances ........................................................................................................... 10
2.2.2.1 Absolute positioning and direct approach ............................................................................. 10
2.2.2.2 Door pre-opening and pre-starting ..................................................................................... 10
2.2.2.3 MES, automatic rescue and assisted electro-manual rescue ................................................... 10
2.2.2.4 Command panel for maintenance operations ........................................................................ 10
2.2.2.5 Efficient control for the car lighting ..................................................................................... 10
2.2.2.6 Control of 2-level stand-by mode ....................................................................................... 10
2.2.2.7 GSM/GPRS Telephone and remote maintenance (it requires sigma4lifts service)....................... 11
2.2.2.8 Audio Kit in car ................................................................................................................ 11
2.2.2.9 MP ecoGO console ............................................................................................................ 11
2.2.2.10 GUIA module ................................................................................................................... 11
2.2.2.11 Software app for PC MP ecoGOTools ................................................................................... 11
2.2.2.12 Car display LCD-070E de 7” ............................................................................................... 11
2.2.2.13 Car display TFT-070E of 7” ................................................................................................ 11
2.3 Installation requirements................................................................................................... 11
2.3.1 Environment of the MRL electrical cabinet............................................................................ 11
2.3.2 Mains power supply .......................................................................................................... 12
2.3.3 Earthing connection .......................................................................................................... 12
2.3.3.1 Earth arrangements (PE) ................................................................................................... 12
2.3.3.2 Main equipotential bonding ................................................................................................ 12
2.4 Controller circuit and auxiliary circuit .................................................................................. 12
2.5 Switching on and off the controller. Electric devices for cut and protection ............................... 12
3 GENERAL DIAGRAMS FOR THE MP ecoGO EPW ...................................................................... 15
3.1 General diagrams for controlling the lift motion .................................................................... 15
3.2 General diagram of communications ................................................................................... 16
3.2.1 Simplex installation ......................................................................................................... 16
3.2.2 Duplex installation ............................................................................................................ 17
3.3 Diagrams of lighting circuits ............................................................................................... 18
4 COMPONENTS OF THE MP ecoGO ........................................................................................... 21
4.1 Distribution of components per package .............................................................................. 21
4.1.1 Cabinet casing ................................................................................................................. 21
4.1.2 Box of trunkings ............................................................................................................... 21
4.1.3 Box of COP ...................................................................................................................... 21
4.1.4 Electrical pre-wiring casing ................................................................................................ 21
4.2 Controller components ...................................................................................................... 22
4.2.1 Presentation of the electrical controller with speed variation .................................................. 22
4.2.2 Frequency inverter ........................................................................................................... 23
4.2.3 Contactors ....................................................................................................................... 24
4.2.4 Protections ...................................................................................................................... 25
4.2.5 Boards ............................................................................................................................ 26
4.2.6 Command panel ............................................................................................................... 30
4.2.7 Power feeds ..................................................................................................................... 31
4.3 Electronic boards and devices ............................................................................................ 32
4.3.1 Elements of the Controller Circuit ....................................................................................... 32
4.3.1.1 MCB board ....................................................................................................................... 32
4.3.1.2 INVERTER unit ................................................................................................................. 33
4.3.1.3 DOC unit ......................................................................................................................... 35
4.3.1.4 CAR board ....................................................................................................................... 37
4.3.1.5 SASE board ..................................................................................................................... 39
4.3.1.6 Landing displays ............................................................................................................... 40
4.3.1.7 LOB unit .......................................................................................................................... 42
4.3.1.8 PESO board ..................................................................................................................... 43
4.3.1.9 GUIA unit ........................................................................................................................ 44
4.3.2 Elements of the Auxiliary Circuit ......................................................................................... 45
V101 - 03/2017 3/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.2.1 ALIM board ...................................................................................................................... 45

4.3.2.2 LINK board ...................................................................................................................... 47
4.3.2.3 TEL board ........................................................................................................................ 49
4.3.3 Elements of mixed-use ...................................................................................................... 51
4.3.3.1 CANx2 board ................................................................................................................... 51
4.3.3.2 MUXCAN board................................................................................................................. 51
4.3.3.3 REV board ....................................................................................................................... 53
4.3.3.4 POS unit .......................................................................................................................... 56
4.3.3.5 Pushbuttons and other elements of IMPULSE series .............................................................. 56
5 ASSEMBLY AND CONNECTION. PARTIAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS .......................................... 58
5.1 Assembling the ALL-IN MRL electrical cabinet ....................................................................... 58
5.1.1 Assembly next to shaft ...................................................................................................... 59
5.1.1.1 Outlet of cables on the top part and bottom part of the cabinet .............................................. 59
5.1.1.2 Niches for the outlet of cables on the top part and bottom part of the cabinet .......................... 60
5.1.1.3 Plinth for doors which height is different from 2160 mm ........................................................ 61
5.1.2 Assembly non-next to shaft ............................................................................................... 62
5.1.2.1 Outlet of cables on the top part and bottom part of the cabinet .............................................. 62
5.1.2.2 Conduits to the shaft ........................................................................................................ 62
5.1.3 Accessory for lfting the cabinet .......................................................................................... 62
5.2 First and permanent electrical connections .......................................................................... 63
5.2.1 Mains connection (power and lighting) ................................................................................ 63
5.2.2 Layout and mains power connection of the machine and brake resistor ................................... 64
5.3 Temporary electrical connections for assembling................................................................... 66
5.3.1 Connecting the assembly remote control ............................................................................. 66
5.3.2 Connecting the overspeed governor and the tension pulley .................................................... 66
5.4 Final electrical connections ................................................................................................ 67
5.4.1 Shaft pre-wiring ............................................................................................................... 67
5.4.1.1 Point “A”, reference point of the shaft pre-wiring .................................................................. 67
5.4.1.2 Layout and assembly of trunkings ...................................................................................... 67
5.4.1.3 Layout and fixing of the shaft pre-wiring ............................................................................. 68
5.4.1.4 Layout and assembly of lights ............................................................................................ 68
5.4.1.5 Placing the top and bottom fixed cams ................................................................................ 69
5.4.1.6 Placing the magnets ......................................................................................................... 69
5.4.1.7 Connection and scheme of shaft lighting and socket ............................................................. 70
5.4.1.8 Connection and scheme for safety chain section of breakdowns.............................................. 71
5.4.1.9 Connection and scheme for safety chain section maintenance ................................................ 72
5.4.1.10 Connection and scheme for safety chain section of doors ....................................................... 73
5.4.1.11 Connection and scheme for communications (shaft CAN) ....................................................... 74
5.4.1.12 Connection and scheme for LOPs and landing indicators ........................................................ 76
5.4.2 Installation of the travelling cable ....................................................................................... 77
5.4.2.1 Layout and fixing the travelling cable .................................................................................. 78
5.4.2.2 Connection and scheme for the travelling cable .................................................................... 79
5.4.3 Box of connections on the car roof (CCT) ............................................................................. 80
5.4.3.1 Presentation of the CCT ..................................................................................................... 80
5.4.3.2 Fixing type of the CCT box on the roof ................................................................................ 81
5.4.3.3 Connection and fixing of the travelling cable to the CCT ........................................................ 83
5.4.3.4 Connection and scheme for the command elements and signage of the CCT ............................ 84
5.4.3.5 Connection and scheme for inspection command .................................................................. 85
5.4.3.6 Connection and scheme for elements associated to the car lighting circuit ............................... 86
5.4.3.7 Connection, scheme and fixing of positioners ....................................................................... 86
5.4.3.8 Connection, scheme and fixing of the alarm pushbutton under the car floor ............................. 87
5.4.3.9 Connection and scheme for contact of car door full open ....................................................... 88
5.4.3.10 Connection and scheme for elements of the safety chain ....................................................... 88
5.4.4 Control box for door operatoor (DOC) ................................................................................. 89
5.4.4.1 Presentation of the DOC box .............................................................................................. 89
5.4.4.2 Connection and scheme to REV board ................................................................................. 89
5.4.4.3 Connection and scheme for the photocell and jamb arrows .................................................... 90
5.4.4.4 Connection and scheme for REVECO operator control ............................................................ 90
5.4.4.5 Connection and scheme for non-MP operator control ............................................................. 91
5.4.5 COP ................................................................................................................................ 92
5.4.5.1 COP fixing ....................................................................................................................... 92
5.4.5.2 Scheme for connection between COP and car roof ................................................................ 93
5.4.5.3 Scheme for internal connection of the COP .......................................................................... 94
6 TECHNICIAN INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 97
6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 97
6.2 Points for handling ............................................................................................................ 98
6.3 Information provided by other elements of the installation .................................................... 98
6.3.1 Car displays ..................................................................................................................... 98
6.3.2 Command panel ............................................................................................................... 99
6.4 Information provided by the electronic boards...................................................................... 99
6.5 Tools: MP ecoGO console and MP ecoGOTools ..................................................................... 100
V101 - 03/2017 4/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

6.5.1 Connecting point for console and PC ................................................................................ 100

6.5.2 Console ......................................................................................................................... 100
6.5.2.1 Console definition ........................................................................................................... 100
6.5.2.2 Keypad ......................................................................................................................... 101
6.5.3 MP ecoGOTools .............................................................................................................. 102
6.6 Other tools: GUIA and TFT-070E display ............................................................................ 102
6.6.1 GUIA module ................................................................................................................. 102
6.6.2 Simulating the console on COP provided with TFT-070E display ............................................ 103
6.6.2.1 Access mode .................................................................................................................. 103
6.6.2.2 Keypad ......................................................................................................................... 103
6.7 Applications (Apps) ......................................................................................................... 103
6.7.1 Launcher App ................................................................................................................. 103
6.7.2 MonitorECO App ............................................................................................................. 104
6.7.3 Parameter manager App.................................................................................................. 105
6.7.4 Error manager App ......................................................................................................... 106
6.7.5 Adjustment App ............................................................................................................. 106
6.7.6 App for commissioning tests (according to EN 81-1, EN 81-20/50) ....................................... 107
6.7.7 Vía Serie console App...................................................................................................... 107
6.7.8 App for Information of boards .......................................................................................... 107
6.7.9 Firmware updating App ................................................................................................... 108
7 ADJUSTMENTS AND COMMISSIONING ................................................................................. 110
7.1 Batteries ....................................................................................................................... 110
7.2 Checking the installation ................................................................................................. 110
7.2.1 General inspection .......................................................................................................... 110
7.2.2 Earth connections ........................................................................................................... 110
7.2.3 Checking the protection efficiency of RCDs ........................................................................ 111
7.2.3.1 Checking the RCD F230 ................................................................................................... 111
7.2.3.2 Checking the RCD FA ...................................................................................................... 111
7.2.3.3 Checking the RCD F110 ................................................................................................... 111
7.2.3.4 Checking the RCD FF ...................................................................................................... 112
7.2.4 Checking the insulation resistance .................................................................................... 112
7.2.5 Checking the safety chain connection ................................................................................ 112
7.2.6 Checking the connection of communication circuits ............................................................. 112
7.3 Adjustment and setting of the controller ............................................................................ 113
7.3.1 Initial settings ................................................................................................................ 114
7.3.2 Local configuration ......................................................................................................... 115
7.3.3 Power supply ................................................................................................................. 116
7.3.4 Machine setting .............................................................................................................. 118
7.3.5 Installation parameters ................................................................................................... 122
7.3.6 Calibration of the accelerometers on roof connection box .................................................... 123
7.3.7 Learning ........................................................................................................................ 123
7.3.8 COP .............................................................................................................................. 125
7.3.9 Calibrating the weight ..................................................................................................... 126
7.3.10 Final adjustments ........................................................................................................... 128
7.3.10.1 Levelling adjustment ....................................................................................................... 128
7.3.10.2 Telephony ..................................................................................................................... 129
7.4 Automated tests previous to the commissioning ................................................................. 133
8 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE ..................................................................................................... 136
8.1 Landing pushbuttons....................................................................................................... 136
8.2 Arrows and landing indicators .......................................................................................... 136
8.3 Car pushbuttons ............................................................................................................. 137
8.4 Display and light indicator of car ...................................................................................... 137
8.5 Acoustic signage for the user ........................................................................................... 138
9 MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS....................................................................................... 139
9.1 Tools for the maintenance................................................................................................ 139
9.1.1 In general ..................................................................................................................... 139
9.1.2 Command panel ............................................................................................................. 139
9.1.3 Block of electrical protections ........................................................................................... 140
9.1.4 Inspection commands ..................................................................................................... 141
9.2 Specific functions for the maintenance .............................................................................. 141
9.2.1 Functions activated via a code on the COP ......................................................................... 141
9.2.2 Remote maintenance through sigma4lifts ......................................................................... 142
9.3 Points for regular check ................................................................................................... 142
9.4 Spare parts ................................................................................................................... 142
10 SPECIFIC FUNTIONS ............................................................................................................ 143
10.1 Management of alarms .................................................................................................... 143
10.1.1 Description of the alarm according to EN 81-28 .................................................................. 143
10.1.2 Triggering an alarm ........................................................................................................ 143
V101 - 03/2017 5/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

10.1.3 Alarm filtering ................................................................................................................ 144

10.1.4 Lift identification ............................................................................................................ 145
10.1.5 Acknowledgement of receipt ............................................................................................ 146
10.1.6 Ending an alarm ............................................................................................................. 146
10.1.7 Calling the lift from the Rescue Centre .............................................................................. 146
10.1.8 Test calls ....................................................................................................................... 146
10.1.9 Information the rescue service shall have .......................................................................... 146
10.1.10 Information to the be supplied to the owner ...................................................................... 147
10.2 Rescue of trapped persons ............................................................................................... 147
10.3 Efficient management of energy ....................................................................................... 147
10.3.1 Management of LEDs and light indicators .......................................................................... 147
10.3.2 Management of car lighting ............................................................................................. 147
10.3.3 First level of stand-by ..................................................................................................... 148
10.3.4 Second level of stand-by ................................................................................................. 148
11 PARAMETERS ....................................................................................................................... 149
11.1 ALIM board .................................................................................................................... 149
11.2 MCB board ..................................................................................................................... 150
11.3 INVERTER unit ............................................................................................................... 166
11.4 LINK board .................................................................................................................... 180
12 FAILURES AND NON STARTING CAUSES .............................................................................. 185
12.1 Failures of the ALIM board ............................................................................................... 185
12.2 Controller errors ............................................................................................................. 191
12.3 Causes for non-starting ................................................................................................... 214
13 APPENDIX A: INFORMATION AND DATA TO BE GIVEN BY THE OWNER TO THE RESCUE
SERVICE ............................................................................................................................................ 214
V101 - 03/2017 6/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

1 SAFETY INFORMATION
1.1 Miscellaneous
This chapter includes instructions to prevent personal and material damages.
These instructions may not be complete. Please contact MP personnel, should you have any doubt or problem.
1.2 Use of the MP ecoGO (EPW1) installation

EPW MP ecoGO has been designed to control either with frequency variation or oleodynamic (according to
typology). Any use of IEP other than that indicated will be considered as misuse.
Reading and complying with the instructions included in this manual, especially those relating to safety, are
considered as part of its appropriate use. Furthermore, carrying out periodic revisions is also considered as part of
its appropriate use.
The fitter and the person responsible for servicing the electrical installation and not manufacturer must be held
responsible for personal and/or material damages arising from misuse.
1.3 Product safety

The product must meet the quality and performance standards stated at the moment of delivery. In general
terms, the product delivered is safe and reliable. IEP MP ecoGO and its additional or supplementary components
must be used under failure-free conditions and be installed and used according to the instructions for use indicated
in this manual.
1.4 Staff requirements

The personnel responsible for installing, starting-up, setting and servicing IEP MP ecoGO must have the
qualification, competence and training required to perform their duties.
On the basis of their knowledge and experience, they should be aware of the risks involved in this type of work
and be familiar with the safety regulations and directives on preventing accidents at work on a European, national
or regional level.
Only the personnel trained for this purpose must be allowed to operate it; apprentices must only work under the
qualified personnel’s supervision.
1.5 Commissioning
During the EPW commissioning, unexpected situations may occur due to improper installation, faulty components,
bad setting or wrong electrical connections.
When setting up, the following must be guaranteed:
 No people or objects must remain in hazardous areas.

 STOP devices must work properly.
 The speed governor and other mechanical brakes must be in operation.
 Safety directives and standards in force must be observed.
1.6 Electric power risks. Residual voltage

Before operating with circuit boards previously installed or in the process of being installed, please ensure they are
disconnected and isolated from the general connection. Furthermore, take all the necessary precautions to prevent
its accidental reconnection.
Most of the MP ecoGO circuit boards incorporate batteries or uninterruptible power supply systems (UPS or SAI for
its Spanish abbreviation). These devices store electrical energy and supply it in case of a power failure, even when
the board is isolated and the main switch is off. Please ensure these devices are disconnected before operating the
circuit board.
In case of controllers incorporating a frequency converter, please also bear in mind that there is risk of death by
electrocution due to the capacitors' residual charge.
If the frequency inverter is to be replaced, the power supply shall be cut off according to
the instructions given at chapter about switching on and off the controller. Furthermore, before
disconnecting the device, you shall wait for at least 5 minutes to ensure there is no
dangerous residual voltage. Otherwise, there is a risk of electric discharge which may
cause death.
1
EPW = Electrical Pre-Wiring
V101 - 03/2017 7/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

1.7 Modifications and operations on MP ecoGO EPW

Do not modify the product, if the modifications have not been explicitly approved by MP. Only use materials and
fittings supplied or recommended by MP. Otherwise, MP will not guarantee the correct operation of the product
and its compliance with standards.
1.8 Obligations of the Installer / Maintenance staff

The product was designed to meet the applicable safety specifications. However, for safety to take effect, the
installing and servicing personnel must comply with all the safety standards relating to its operation.
The installing/servicing company is responsible for planning and executing the measures ensuring the technical
personnel’s safety. These measures and their observance must guarantee their safety.
In particular, the installing/servicing company must ensure that:
 The use of the product always meets its specifications.
 Installation operation is correct, and that special attention is paid to all safety devices and to their
periodic revision.
 The protection equipment required for the installing and servicing personnel must be available and
operative.
 Technical documentation must be available and in good condition.
 The personnel operating the product must be duly qualified and have the equipment required.
 All the safety and warning labels must be stuck to the equipment and not removed.
V101 - 03/2017 8/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE EPW MP ecoGO

2.1 General features
The Electrical Pre-Wiring (EPW) MP ecoGO is based on the MP ecoGO controller, but also on execution principles
and electrical connection that are simple and safe.
The basic installation is designed in accordance with the requirements the European directives 95/16/EC and
2014/33/EU, by complying the harmonised standard EN 81-1 and EN 81/20/50.
The MP ecoGO controller is an advanced control system fir lifts supporting electrical and hydraulic lifts, with a
machine room and machine room less lifts (MRL), with a load capability up to 5000 kg and a speed range up to
2.5 m/s. It enables the control of groups of up to 6 lifts with a maximum of 32 stops.
It is provided with electronics, distributed into the electrical installation, and CAN-BUS communication between the
different electronic boards. The controller design is modular in order to get expandable the number of signals it
manages, where required. The main electronic boards are located into the electrical cabinet and on the car roof,
even if there are also additional boards into the shaft and on the operating panels. The voltage is 24 VDC for the
control supply and 110 Vac for the safety chain supply.
It is provided with two independent circuits, one for the lift control, which is the controller itself, and another one
for the control of auxiliary functions, such as the alarm, the intercom or the system of electro-manual rescue,
which is called auxiliary circuit. The permanent presence of these two circuits allows the implementation of
redundant control systems on some safety elements.
The MP ecoGO controller incorporates components of top energy efficiency and optimises the energy consumption
for each function. As an example, all the information LEDs remain switched OFF as long as the lift operates in
normal mode and there is no need of control from the technical staff.
All the connections of boards and electronic or electrical devices are plug-in and error-proofing. When, for
unavoidable reasons, an electronic board is provided with identical connectors, the exchange of the connections
will never cause a dangerous situation, nor the damage of any device and the controller will immediately detect
the irregularity and inform the technician about it.
On the other hand, the connections for configurable signals of input and output in the different electronic boards
are provided with protections preventing them from the destruction in the event of a wrong connection.
Concerning the electrical pre-wiring, it has been designed bearing in mind the following issues:
 The number of connections to be carried out by the installer has been kept to a minimum by grouping
connectors as much as safety and rules of electrical execution allow.
 Particular emphasis has been put on making easier the proper execution of earth connections, by
increasing the visibility of the screw connections or by providing elements enabling an automatic
connection.
 A reference point has been defined in the shaft electrical installation; it is marked with an A on the
drawings and on the cable harness to set the wiring properly, thus avoiding troubles of cable lengths.
 The internal wiring of the different electrical casings has been designed in format of standard wire looms,
identified one by one to enable a quick replacement in the event of damage.
Finally, the MP ecoGO electrical pre-wiring has been designed to be fully accessible from the sigma4lifts system,
which immediately enables accessing the failures and events of the lift, monitoring and remote parameter setting,
but also updating the multimedia contents in the different electronic devices of the installation.
2.2 Performances of the EPW MP ecoGO

2.2.1 Overview
The MP ecoGO installation incorporates a great number of advanced functions, both to improve the safety and
comfort of the users and to make easier the installation and maintenance jobs to the technical staff.
Most of these performances are supplied as standard, in all the installations. Only few of them will require a price
supplement.
It is in compliance with the following harmonised standards for the items which are to be applied:
 EN 81-1, EN 81-2  EN 81-70 (optional)

 EN 81-20, EN 81-50  EN 81-71 (optional)
 EN 81-21 (optional)  EN 81-72 (optional)
 EN 81-28  EN 81-73 (optional)
 EN 81-77 (optional)
V101 - 03/2017 9/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2.2.2 Main performances

2.2.2.1 Absolute positioning and direct approach
Installations provided with MP ecoGO INVERTER incorporate a built-in absolute positioning system providing a
levelling accuracy at stopping of ±5 mm. This positioning system does not require any specific device for this
function, except for two magnet switches to read auxiliary signals of position correction and unlocking area.
On the other hand, in all the operations of floor reaching, in Normal mode, the controller carries out a direct
approach to the floor level, without going through any low speed.
2.2.2.2 Door pre-opening and pre-starting

MP ecoGO installations may be provided with door pre-opening and pre-starting.
Thanks to the pre-opening, the car unloading by passengers is speeded up, at the end of the travel, as the doors
start the opening before the car is fully stopped.
The pre-starting function allows carrying out all the preliminary operations, prior to the starting, while the doors
are closing, in such a way that as soon the closing is completed, the lift starts moving immediately.
These two functions combined and acting together with the direct approach described in previous paragraph,
enable the lift provided with MP ecoGO controller takes, in every travel, 8 seconds less than another one having
same rated speed when it is not provided with these functions.
2.2.2.3 MES, automatic rescue and assisted electro-manual rescue

MP ecoGO incorporates, as standard, 3 different rescue systems, to be applied depending on the situation.
The emergency electrical operation (MES) allows the lift motion from the command panel inside the electrical
cabinet, with mains voltage, even when the safety chain section of breakdowns is open. This system allows taking
the car to the floor level in the event of stopping due to an overspeed or an overtravel.
The automatic rescue only works in the event of a mains power failure, by means of an emergency power source
to take the car to the floor level and open the doors. It is a fully automatic system which does not require any
technician or user performance. The lift will automatically switch to Normal mode, when the mains power is
restored.
The assisted electro-manual rescue allows the machine brake opening, in a safe way, if a breakdown in the lift
electrical equipment occurs, when the previous systems are rendered useless. It requires skilled staff operating
from the command panel in the electrical cabinet. The rescue activation causes the brake opening and the lift
moves in the direction determined by the load imbalance between the car and the counterweight. The system
controls the lift speed and stops it if 0.30 m/s are exceeded. In addition, it also controls the position, so that it
stops the lift and considers the rescue completed when the car reaches the floor level.
2.2.2.4 Command panel for maintenance operations

MP ecoGO always provides a Command Panel, located inside the electrical cabinet. It is the element from which
the basic functions related to the lift maintenance and the rescue operations already described are activated.
The command panel provides information about the motion (upwards or downwards) and the car position (at level
or out of level), as well as about the ongoing alarms. On the other hand, it allows switching OFF and ON the
different circuits of the controller and also activating auxiliary functions like the electro-manual rescue, MES, TEST
mode and the safe bypass of the contacts of doors in the safety chain
2.2.2.5 Efficient control for the car lighting

The controller MP ecoGO switches OFF the car light when the lift is stopped, empty and with doors closed, for an
optimisation of the electrical consumption associated to the lighting.
The car light is automatically reactivated as soon as a landing call is logged.
2.2.2.6 Control of 2-level stand-by mode

The stand-by control carries out the switching off of the different controller circuits when they are not active, for
reducing the electrical consumption of the lift.
It is provided with two levels which are activated after the lift is idle for a configurable time.
When the first level timing is over, the system cuts the circuits supplying the frequency inverter, the car and the
shaft indicators. The normal operation is restored when a landing call is made; the response time is less than 3
seconds.
When the second level timing is over, the controller turns off completely and only the auxiliary circuits remain
activated. In this case, the switching to normal mode can be done, depending on the setting, through any landing
call or via the activation of a specific pushbutton. The response time to get back to normal mode is less than 30
seconds.
The second level can also be activated via a weekly schedule, by determining the timetable for switching off and
on for every day of the week. In this case, the lift will always and automatically enter and leave the stand-by
mode at the established time.
V101 - 03/2017 10/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2.2.2.7 GSM/GPRS Telephone and remote maintenance (it requires sigma4lifts service)
Lifts provided with MP ecoGO controller can incorporate an emergency telephone, with GSM/GPRS technology,
enabling the transmission of voice and data via a mobile phone network.
In turn, this data transmission enables the connection to sigma4lifts service, which provides a great number of
advanced functions to help the lift technician: Log of alarms and test calls (EN 81-28), acceptance of breakdowns
and events in real time, statistic reports related to the lift, telemetry, remote control, remote setting, remote
updating of firmware and multimedia contents, etc.
2.2.2.8 Audio Kit in car

The audio kit provides 3 additional functions: gong, voice synthesizer and night mode.
The gong is the audible signal when the car reaches the floor. It is in accordance with the standard EN 81-70,
distinguishing, with different audible signals, calls having a predefined direction (upwards or downwards) from
calls which not.
The voice synthesizer informs the passenger who is at the destination floor about the run direction and the state of
the doors.
Finally, the night mode enables reducing or, even, removing the audible signals during a determined time slot, for
adapting the sound level of le lift to the building.
2.2.2.9 MP ecoGO console

The ecoGO console is an advanced tool for the controller setting; it is provided with TFT-070E graphic display
showing a clear and concise information of the different controller issues. Among other functions, it enables the lift
monitoring, the parameter setting, the configuration of the different electronic devices and the access to the
listings of the controller failures and events. It can also be an interactive guide to carry out the tests related to the
different functions and the lift commissioning.
2.2.2.10 GUIA module

The GUIA module is a built-in console for the controller programming, which is permanently inserted into the
electrical cabinet.
It provides the same performances as those of MP ecoGO console, enabling the lift monitoring, the parameter
setting and the configuration of the different electronic devices of the lift.
2.2.2.11 Software app for PC MP ecoGOTools

The MP ecoGO controller is provided with a software APP enabling the controller setting from a portable PC, via an
USB-CAN interface module, called HEA. This application provides all the functions included in the Console and, in
some cases, it can even allow a greater scope.
2.2.2.12 Car display LCD-070E de 7”

The COP of MP ecoGO EPW includes an LCD display, in blue and 7”, providing the following information: car
position, motion direction, lift load level and controller operation mode.
2.2.2.13 Car display TFT-070E of 7”

The TFT-070E colour allows the performance enlargement of this device, compared to the standard LCD-070E, as
it supports additional functions and brings colourful images and graphics which are customizable to the COP.
The contents are updatable, either directly, via Ethernet connection, or in a remote way, via sigma4lifts service.
One of its main functions is to simulate the programming console. Through activating a code onto the COP, the
TFT-070E display together with certain COP pushbuttons become an auxiliary console implementing a large part
the MP ecoGO console functions.
2.3 Installation requirements

2.3.1 Environment of the MRL electrical cabinet
The access to the MRL cabinet shall be easy in all circumstances, without necessitating entry into private premises.
It shall also be sufficiently illuminated and ventilated.
The floor shall be of non-slip material, not favouring the creation of dust.
The temperature shall be maintained between +5ºC and +40ºC.
Minimum passageways required by building regulations are not obstructed by the open door of the lift or of the
machinery cabinet.
The shaft shall be provided with permanently installed electric lighting, giving an intensity of illumination of at
least 50 lux at floor level.
A clear horizontal space in front of the MRL cabinet shall be provided:

 Height of 2.2 m.
 Width of 0.5 m.
 Depth of 0.7 m, measured from the external surface of the cabinet.
V101 - 03/2017 11/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2.3.2 Mains power supply

The power supply system shall be TT-type. If it is an IT or TN-type power supply system, check with our technical
department.
The connection of the device to the mains shall be carried out with cores according to the local regulations.
The cores will different if the installation is EN 81-1 compliant or EN 81-20 compliant; as, in the latter case the
cores for the lighting shall be differentiated from the ones for the power.
The following table shows the relevant number and section cores:
Number of cores x cross-section (mm2) + t (earth) EN 81 - 1 EN 81 - 20

7.5 4x4+t 4 x 2.5 + t
Power (kW) 11 4x6+t 4x4+t
15 4 x 10 + t 4x6+t
Lighting - Non applicable 2x4+t
The network frequency will be 50 or 60 Hz, depending on the local grid.
2.3.3 Earthing connection

2.3.3.1 Earth arrangements (PE)
The earthing protection shall be good. To ensure it is good, you can make the following check:
RA << 167 Ω, where RA is the sum of the resistances, in Ω, of the earth electrode and the earthing conductor of
the exposed conductive parts (we recommend to get it as close as possible to zero).
The exposed conductive parts simultaneously accessible shall be, individually, in groups or collectively connected
to the same earth connection.
The protective conductors shall be in accordance with the requirements of the IEC 60364-5-54.
Each circuit shall be provided with its protective conductor connected to the corresponding earth terminal.
2.3.3.2 Main equipotential bonding

In every building, the earth conductor, the main earth terminal and the conductor elements in general shall be
connected to the main equipotential bonding.
The conductors of the main equipotential bonding shall be in accordance to the specifications included in the
Harmonisation Document HD 60364-5-54.
2.4 Controller circuit and auxiliary circuit

As already pointed in this document introduction, the MP ecoGO controller is provided with two independent
circuits, one for the lift control, which is the controller itself, and the other one for the control of auxiliary
functions, which is called auxiliary circuit. These two circuits have their own and independent supplies and
microprocessors and they usually work in parallel.
The controller is responsible for the specific functions of the lift control, as the management of calls, the
positioning, the starting and stopping, the control of doors and weight, the management of pushbuttons and
indicators, the special modes of operation, the control of the automatic rescue, etc.
On the other hand, the auxiliary circuit supports the auxiliary functions, like alarms, telephone and intercom, the
shaft lighting control, the emergency lighting, the monitoring of the electrical power supplies, the stand-by control,
the clock, the temperature control and the control of the electro-manual rescue.
Due to technical reasons, the auxiliary circuit is also responsable for the control of the digital audio circuit,
responding to the controller commands in whatever has to do with lift functions related to the audio, like the gong
or the voice synthesizer.
The permanent presence of these two circuits enables implementing redundant control systems for some safety
elements, like the circuit controlling the movements with doors open.
2.5 Switching on and off the controller. Electric devices for cut and protection
MP ecoGO electric controller provides several devices for switching on and off the
different circuits that make up the MP ecoGO EPW.
On the command panel, the SIO selector allow switching off the controller (OFF
position) on the one hand and, on the other hand, both the controller and the
auxiliary circuit (OFF+ position). The table about Electric devices for cut and
protection shows the switching effect of the different switches on the installation
circuits.
In the first case, it cuts the 24 VDC power supply of the controller circuit, called
24M, and, in the second one, in addition, it also cuts the 24 VDC of the auxiliary
circuit, called 24A. In ON position, both circuits remain activated.
V101 - 03/2017 12/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Likewise, in the electrical protection block, the SMAIN main switch cuts the
controller circuit and also the power. However, it does not cut the power supply
of the auxiliary circuit which remains activated, taking power supply from the
lighting circuit or from the emergency supply.
The FF RCD (which can be located into the lift controller or into
the main electrical panel of the building) and QF power magneto
thermal switch cut the power, like SMAIN does, but not the
controller circuit, as 24M power supply remains activated.
On the other hand, the disconnection of FBAT fuse enables cutting the emergency power
supply.
Depending on the installation requirements and the subsequent inverter power required, the fuses to
protect R, S, T will be one (FSM1) or three (FMS1, FMS2, FMS3).
If only FSM1 is included, T would be the only phase protected.
F220 RCD (only for EN 81-20/50) cuts the 230M power supply, but not the
controller circuit as 24M power supply remains activated.
F110 RCD (only for EN 81-20/50) cuts the 110 VAC power supply for safety chain.
V101 - 03/2017 13/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Concerning the lighting and sockets circuits, they are protected by FA RCD
(which can be located into the lift controller or into the main electrical panel
of the building) and the magneto thermal switches QAC, QAH and QTC:
 FA cuts all the circuits of lighting and sockets.

 QAC cuts the circuit of car lighting and sockets.
 QAH cuts the circuit of shaft and machine room lighting.
 QTC cuts power supply circuit of pit sockets and electrical controller.
The following table shows the switching effect of the different switches on the
power supply of the different circuits, when the above mentioned elements
are used to cut off.
Electric devices for cut and protection:
R, S, T, N 230M 110Vs 24M / 24H 24A 24B

(VAC) (VAC) (VAC) (VDC) (VDC) (VDC)
SMAIN OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
FF/QF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
F220 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
F110 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
SIO
OFF + ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
FBAT OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
230C 230H 230TC

(VAC) (VAC) (VAC)
FA OFF OFF OFF OFF
QAC OFF OFF OFF OFF
QAH OFF ON OFF ON
QTC OFF ON OFF ON
 R, S, T, N: voltage coming from the mains (3 phases and neutral)

 230M: 230 VDC of controller
 110 Vs: 110 VDC of safety chain
 24M: 24 VDC of controller
 24A: 24 VDC of auxiliary circuit
 24B: 24 VDC coming from batteries
 230C: 230 VAC of car lighting
 230H: 230 VAC of shaft lighting
 230TC: 230 VAC for power supply of sockets
V101 - 03/2017 14/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

3 GENERAL DIAGRAMS FOR THE MP ecoGO EPW

3.1 General diagrams for controlling the lift motion
This chapter is dedicated to the different electrical drawings associated to the motor control, according to the type
of traction.
Electrical lift with variable speed
RSTN
FM2 1 XPWK FA QTC XFMA1 5 TCN
NM2 2 1 L1 L1 6 TCF
FM2 3
XPWFT 2 L2 L2
SMAIN
NM2 4 3 L3 L3
QAH XFMA2 1 FH
+VFR 7
2 NH
-VFR 8
FF
+
QAC
XPWUVW INVERTER QF
W3
V2
U1
XFMA1 XFMA1
CP 1 2 3 4
NM
FM
NC
FC
K1 K2 XSMUVW PE
1
2 M
3 3
K1 K2
MCB
XMCMN7 24M 24M 4 XMK1 K1 K2 XSMMAQ

2 VF-1
19 KP KP 8 1 VF+1
ALIM
NM0
FM0
4 VF-2
NC
FC
3 VF+2 12 9 2 1
XAL230 XALAC
+VFR10 XMK2 K1 XMK212 +VRM

-VFR 8 6 -VRM K230
K 9 K2
0VS 11 +VRM1 XAL230
-VRM 4
BK
FM1 2
NM1 5
KSTB1 KUPS1
NM2 7 XPM1
SIO XPM15 -VRM
FM2 1
SIO 9 +VRM
XALTRM XAL230 XAL230
12 +VRM 4 3 2 1 6 3 11 8
11 -VRM
0VS
110VS
NM2
FM2
NM4
FM4
NMC
FMC
SIO 8 NM1
SIO 4 FM1
XSMCM01
XPM6 2 NM2 15 FM2
K1 K2
1 FM2 14 NM2
FA
PM XDCAC1
5
NM4
6
FM4
SASE
NM2
FM2
0VS 2 XSASE2
XRVTC
1
2
K 1
FM3
3
XSASE2 3 0VS NM2 NM3

2
4 110VS FOP T
XRVOP1
1
REV DOC
XOPOP
KEY:
 BK: Block of contactors

 CP: Block of electrical protections
 DOC: DOC board
 FA: Power source
 INVERTER: Frequency inverter
 K1, K2: Run contactors
 M: Machine
 MCB: MCB board
 PM: Command panel
 REV: REV board
 SASE: SASE board
 SIO: Switch for switching on and off the command panel
V101 - 03/2017 15/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

3.2 General diagram of communications

This chapter is dedicated to the drawings of the different series of data communications, all of them of CAN BUS
type, both for para simplex configuration and group of 2 lifts.
3.2.1 Simplex installation
DRIVE MCB LINK ALIM AUDIO

XALPH
6 CAH
3 CAL
XDRMCB XMCMN 4 24V

3 CANH 0V 8
1 0V
2 CANL CML12 XMCBT2 XLK1 XLK1 XALLK
1 24MB 0V 8 1 24A CAL 1 2 CAL
1 0V CMH24 2 CBH CBL 7 2 CAH 0V 2
CAN - B CAN - A 5 CAH
1124V 24M 7 3 0V CBH 6 3 CAL CAH 3
0V 3 4 CBL 24B 5 4 0V 24A 4
CML11 XALCAN
14 8 7 1 2 3 4 9 10
CMH23
CAH
24A
CAL
0V
CHH
CHL
24CH
CHH
CHL
24MC14
XMCMN
4 9 21 13 20 10 22 1
0V
CHL
CHH
24MH
0V
CHL
CHH
24MH
CAN - M CAN - A
CAN - H
24MC
24MH
CMH
CML
CHH
CHL
CAH
24A
CAL
0V
1 2 3 0V
1 2 3 4
XSMCM01 XSMIH01
4 5 6 7
REV
XSMCM01
DOC
XRVDOC CML 1XOPCAN
1 CML
2 CMH CMH 2 OPC
BOP CAN - M 3 0V 0V 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CAN - A 6 24MC 24MC 6
CML 4
XRVCAM
4 CML CML 4
CMH 3 5 CMH CMH 5
24MC 2
CAN - M
0V 8
CAH 7
CAL 6 CAR
LOB 24A 5 CAN - M
BOC
CAN - H
XCAN4(n)
1 0V 1A 0V XRVCMC CML 1XDCCMC
1 CML
XCAN 2 CML 2A CML 2 CMH CMH 2
3 CMH 3A CMH 3 0V 0V 3
4 24MC 4A 24MH 6 24MC 24MC 6
AUDIO 4 CML CML 4
5 CMH CMH 5
XRVCAU CAN - A
CAL 1
CAH 2
XCAN6(n)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2A CML 0V 3
24A 6
DISPLAY 3A
4A
CMH
24MH CAL 4
1A 0V CAH 5
TEL
5A CMH
6A CML XRVCAC CAL 1XTLCAC
1 CAL
2 CAH CAH 2
3 0V 0V 3
6 24A 24V 6
1A 0V
XCAN41 2A CML
4 CAL CAL 4
5 CAH CAH 5
3A CMH
4A 24MH
2B CML
3B CMH
KEY:
 ALIM: ALIM board

 AUDIO: AUDIO board
 BOC: COP
 BOP: LOP
 CAN-A: CAN BUS of auxiliary circuit
 CAN-H: CAN BUS of shaft circuit
 CAN-M: CAN BUS of controller circuit
 CAR: CAR board
 DRIVE: Drive board (frequency INVERTER)
 LINK: LINK board
 LOB: LOB board
 MCB: MCB board
 REV: REV board
 TEL: TEL board
V101 - 03/2017 16/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

3.2.2 Duplex installation
XSM1X01 XSM2X01
5 24MB 5 24MB
6 CBH 6 CBH
CAN - B1 CAN - B2
7 CBL 7 CBL
MUXCAN
8 0V 8 0V
XMXOUT
LINK 0V 1
XMXLOOP XMXOUT
1 0V
CL0 2 2 CL0
XLK1 XSM1X02 XSM2X02
5 5 CH0 3 3 CH0
1 24A 24A 24A
2 CAH 6 CAH 6 CAH 24VL 4 4 24VL
CAN - A 7 7
CAN - A
3 CAL CAL CAL
4 0V 8 0V 8 0V
1 24A 1 24A 0V 1
XMXE2
XLK1 2 CAH 2 CAH CL2 2
5 6 7 8 CAN - A CAN - A CAN - A
3 CAL 3 CAL CH2 3
24B
CBH
CBL
0V
4 0V 4 0V 24V2 4
XMXE1
1 2 3 4
0V
CL1
CH1
24V1
MCB CAN - B1 ALIM MCB ALIM
24MB
24MB
24MB
24MB
CAH
CBH
CBH
CAH
CBH
CBH
CAL
24A
CAL
24A
CBL
CBL
CBL
CBL
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
XMCBT1
1 2 4 3
XMCBT2
1 2 3 4
XALLK
1 2 3 4 ASC 1 ASC 2 XMCBT1
1 2 4 3
XMCBT2
1 2 3 4
XALLK
1 2 3 4
CAN - B2
KEY:
 ALIM: ALIM board

 ASC 1: Lift 1
 ASC 2: Lift 2
 AUDIO: AUDIO board
 BOC: COP
 BOP: LOP
 CAN-A: CAN BUS of auxiliary circuit
 CAN-B1: CAN BUS for lift 1 of a group
 CAN-B2: CAN BUS for lift 2 of a group
 CAR: CAR board
 DRIVE: Drive board (frequency INVERTER)
 LINK: LINK board
 LOB: LOB board
 MCB: MCB board
 REV: REV board
 TEL: TEL board
V101 - 03/2017 17/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

3.3 Diagrams of lighting circuits
Single-phase mains
TN
Controller FA
QAH
QAC
QTC
XFMA1
XALAC
FC FC
4
NC NC
2
XFMA2 2 NH
XFMA1 5 TCN
6 TCF
1 FH
XALAH
XALAH
XPM1
RBF RBF RBF

3
FAS FAS FAF

2
FCS FCS FCF

6
SALH
KHH
XSMCM02
XSMIH02
4
5
6
7
2
1
1
2
3
NCA
NOA
RBF
NH
TCF
TCN
FC
NC
FH
SPHH
FC
NC
XRVEA
3
4
3 4 PHH 4
XRVTC
24MC 1
SALH
Switch for shaft

lighting on the
car roof
TC
K4
K3
XRV230T2
XRVHTC2
XRVHC 2
XRVVT 2
XRVTE 2
Shaft pre-wiring
1 VC
1 HC
1 FC
1 FC
1 FC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
t
t
t
Car light Socket Car roof

Extractor light
V101 - 03/2017 18/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

3.4
INSPECTION COMMAND
SASE SIC
Block of contactors
Block of command panel
SIS
SIB
Safety Chain closed
SIR STPC
Contactors control
SIR
SBR
Safety chain
Reading point for the SASE board
V101 - 03/2017
40I 43I 43I 44I 44I 42I 45I
BOX OF CONNECTIONS ON THE CAR ROOF
30R 30T 31T 31T 40T 40R 41R 41I 42I 45T 46T 46T 47T 47T 50T 50R 80R 80T 90T 90R
SAC
SPC
SBR
SFIN
SEC1
SEC2
STPB
30R 40R 41R 50R A 90C
40R
90C
40C CONTROLLER OFTHE
19/216
40B 41B
MACHINE ROOM
30H 90C
40B
90B
SLV
SBP1 SMES
41B
KN1
SBP2 SBP3 SBP4
60B 85
SMS
SMB
60H
SMES KN2 200

20H 20B 70B 80B
95
STLV
70H 80H 95 200 200
10H 60S
70H 80H
10H
SD21
50H 51H 60H 70H 80H 80H
SIR' STOP
MTELecoGO_101_EN
INSPECTION COMMAND SIS'
SPE
SCE
STPF
STPH
IN THE PIT SIC'

A
SIB'
IDENTIFIYING THE CONTACTS OF THE SAFETY CHAIN:
CONTACT DESCRIPTION
BAJ Down direction pushbutton of assembly remote control
KN1 Relay for bypass of door contacts in the safety chain
KN2 Relay for bypass of door contacts in the safety chain
SAC Safety gear
SAFC Cable slackening
SBP1 Selector of by-pass
SBP2 Selector of by-pass for semiautomatic hinged landing doors (SPE)
SBP3 Selector of by-pass for lock of landing doors (SCE)
SBP4 Selector of by-pass for car door (SPC)
SBR Balustrade contact
SCE Landing door lock
SECx Car interlocking
SFIN Final limit switch
SFRI Bottom final limit switch for travel in inspection mode
SFRS Top final limit switch for travel in inspection mode
SIB Pushbutton on car roof for down motion in inspection mode
SIB’ Pushbutton in the pit for down motion in inspection mode
SIC Common pushbutton on car roof for up/down motion in inspection mode
SIC’ Common pushbutton in the pit for up/down motion in inspection mode
SIR Selector on car roof in inspection
SIR’ Selector in pit of inspection
SIS Pushbutton on roof for up motion in inspection mode
SIS’ Pushbutton in pit for up motion in inspection
SLV Overspeed governor
SMB Pushbutton for down motion in MES mode
SMES Selector for electrical rescue operation (MES)
SMM Connector by-pass for the assembly remote control
SMS Pushbutton for up motion in MES mode
SPC Car door
SPE Semiautomatic hinged landing door
STH Trappe contact
STLV Governor tension pulley
STPB COP stop
STPC Car stop
STPF Pit stop
STPM Stop of the assembly remote control
STPS Machine stop
SUB Pushbutton for up motion on the assembly remote control
V101 - 03/2017 20/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4 COMPONENTS OF THE MP ecoGO

4.1 Distribution of components per package
The different packages making up MP ecoGO EPW and their content are related here below.
4.1.1 Cabinet casing

 Controller
 Box of batteries
 COP (if it a flush mounting COP or a FUSION model)
 Brake Resistor
 Kit of assembly remote control (optional)
 Curtain photocell (optional for an installation according to EN 81-1/2; compulsory for EN 81-20)
 Console (optional)
 Cabinet fixing hardware
4.1.2 Box of trunkings

4.1.3 Box of COP
Only when it is a full-height type COO; otherwise, the COP is supplied into the controller casing.
4.1.4 Electrical pre-wiring casing

 Connection box and cable harnesses
o Roof connection box (identified on drawings with CCT initials)
o Harnesses for car roof elements
o Harnesses for car door operator
o Harnesses for COP
 Car accessories
o Box for car door operator (DOC) control
o Alarm pushbutton box (only for an installation according to EN 81-1/2)
o Inspection command for car roof
o Portable light
o Jamb arrow
o Final limit switch
o Positioners
o 100 mm-plastoferrite magnets
 Shaft electrical pre-wiring and harnesses
o Shaft wiring loom
o Connection harnesses for LOP control
o Harnesses for lights of machine, shaft and emergency (the latter is only for an installation
according to EN 81-1/2)
o Shaft installation harnesses
 Shaft accessories
o LOB boxes
o Emergency lighting (only for an installation according to EN 81-1/2)
o Pit box
o Stop pushbutton for headroom and pit
o Inspection command for pit (only for an installation according to EN 81-20)
 Travelling cable
 Lightings for machine and shaft
 LOPs
 Fixing hardware for car
o Fastener for positioner and final limit switch
o Additional alarm box
o Fixing for travelling cable
o Fixing for harnesses
o Support for inspection command
o Connection box for the roof
o Square set for balustrade according to EN 81-20/50
o Small upright for fastening the connection box
o Bag of support for shaft lighting
 Hardware fixing for shaft
o Bag of support for shaft lighting (5 lamps)
o Wedged support for travelling cable
o Bag of additional accessories
o Pit box
o Cam for Final limit switch
o Bag of cast iron flange for cam
V101 - 03/2017 21/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.2 Controller components

4.2.1 Presentation of the electrical controller with speed variation
The following picture shows the complete ALL-IN MRL cabinet and the different blocks it consists of.
BLOCK NAME CONTENT MODELS DETERMINING
MP ecoGO INVERTER frequency 7.5 kW Operation current

Inverter
inverter 15 kW of the installation
Contactor
7.5 kW
DC-Reactor Operation current
Contactors 11 kW
Connection of machine’s control of the installation
15 kW
and power
SMAIN main switch

Power RCD
Magneto-thermal switch for
mains power
Lighting RCD
Magneto-thermal switch for 7.5 kW
Operation current
Protections shaft lighting 11 kW
of the installation
Magneto-thermal switch for car 15 kW
lighting
Controller fuses
EMI filter for mains power
EMI filter for controller and
lighting
ALIM board
Electronic
MCB board - -
boards
SASE board
Alarm indicator
Level indicator
SIO switch, to switch ON and
OFF the circuits and the rescue
by means of imbalance load
MODE selector switch, for
selecting the controller
Command
operation mode: NORMAL, MES, - -
panel
TEST
Pushbuttons to move upwards
and downwards in MES mode
BYPASS selector switch, for
bridging the door safety series
Changeover switch for shaft
lighting
Additional LINK board or Lift 1: LINK
-
boards MUXCAN board Lift 2: MUXCAN
DC-AC converter (24 VDC /
220~)
Power feeds - -
Power source (220~ / 24 VDC)
Fuse of batteries
Connector of travelling cable
Connectors Connector of shaft pre-wiring - -
Optional connectors
Batteries 2 x 12Vdc 5 Ah
- -
V101 - 03/2017 22/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The cabinet is structured into interconnected blocks for an easy replacement if required.
The different blocks, starting from the top to the bottom, are described here below.
4.2.2 Frequency inverter

This block consists of the frequency inverter, the brake resistor and the encoder connection; the latter are
connected to the inverter. It contains the following connections which are typified depending on whether they
are factory-made or not:
 Connection to be made at jobsite:

o XPWFR: Output for brake resistor. The shield-earth interconnection is guaranteed within the
connection itself.
 40 Ω, 2200 W for 7.5 kW-inverter
 30 Ω, 4400 W for 11 kW-inverter
 30 Ω, 6000 W for 15 kW-inverter
o XENC: Encoder connection
 Factory-made connection:
o XPWFT: Power feed input of 400 VAC-mains power, after going through the EMC filter and
the electrical protections
o XPWUVW: Output to run contactors K1, K2
o XPWDC: Harmonic filter DC-Reactor
o XDRMCB: Connection for 24 VDC-control circuits
 EN: Inverter ready to run
 +24GT, CANH, CANL, 0V: controller CAN
 MF1, MF2: Brake micro switches
 TM1, TM2: machine thermal probe
o XPWK: Connection for 110 VAC and 230 VAC-control circuits
 FM2, NM2, FM2, NM2: 230 VAC-input for brake and automatic rescue
 A1K, A2K: Safety chain reading
 -VFR, +VFR: Brake power supply output previous to contactors
Brake resistor
XPWFR
XPWK
XDRMCB WFR
XENC 1 BN
XPWFR 3 BU
GNYE
XPWFT XPWUVW XPWDC
Encoder
V101 - 03/2017 23/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.2.3 Contactors
All the elements contained in this block are related to the inverter and the machine. These elements are:
 Contactors, K1, K2:
o LC7K1210F7: valid for 7.5 kW-inverter
o LC1D032FL: valid for 11 kW-inverter
o LC1D038FL: valid for 15 kW-inverter
 DC Reactor: harmonic filter
o 18 A: valid for 7.5 kW-inverter
o 36 A: valid for 11 kW and 15 kW-inverter
 Connections to be made at jobsite:
o XSMUVW: Machine power circuit
o XSMMAQ1: Brake coil 1
o XSMMAQ2: Brake coil 2
o XSMMAQ3: Brake micro switches 1 and (MF1, MF2) and thermal probe (TM1, TM2)
o XSMBT: IT IS ONLY USED FOR TEST. IN NORMAL SITUATION, IT IS FREE FROM
CONNECTION.
REMARK: The shield-earth interconnection is guaranteed within the connection itself, if it is
made like shown in the figure
 Factory-made connections:
o XMK1: Interconnection between the block of boards and 24 VDC-circuit
o XMK2: Interconnection between the block of boards and 110 Vac, 230 Vac, 230 VDC-circuit
XPWUVW XPWFT XPWDC
K1 K2
XMK1
XPWFT XPWDC
XPWUVW
DC REACTOR 1 2 3 4 3
1 2 3
L1
L2
L3
BN
BN
BN
XMK2
L3 L2 L1
T3 T2 T1
BN
BU
GY
BK
BK
BN
BN
BN
T3 T2 T1
L3 L2 L1
XSMMAQ1/2/3 XSMUVW BN BN
71 71
72 72
BN
FVEMC BN L1 L2 L3
BN
BN
BN
1 2 3
9mH
XSMUVW FVEMC DCREACTOR

/4.4:4
XMK2
7 5 3 1 8 2 6 4
0VS
+VRM
-VRM
K
A1K
A2K
+VFR
-VFR
XSMBT
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH +VFR 1
WH -VFR 2
XSMMAQ1 WMAQ1/2 XMAQ BR1

VF+1 1 1 VF+1 GY VF+1 1
L4 L4
WH
K1 K2 VF-1 2 2 VF-1 VF-1 2
BK
T4 T4
A1 A1
K1 K2 XSMMAQ2 BR2
WH WH VF+2 1 1 VF+2 BU VF+2 3
A2 A2
WH WH WH VF-2 2 2 VF-2 BN VF-2 4
XSMMAQ3 TM
WMAQ3
WH WH TM1 1 1 TM1 BN TM1 5 + -
WH TM2 2 2 TM2 GN TM2 6

62
K2 MF1 3 3 MF1 MF1 7 11
MF112
WH WH
61
62
MF212
K1 WH MF2 4 4 MF2 GY MF2 8 11
61
WH 24V 5 5 24V YW 24V 9
WH
WH
TM1
TM2
24M
MF1
MF2
24V
KP
4 8 1 2 3 5 6
XMK1
V101 - 03/2017 24/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.2.4 Protections
This block consists of the protection elements and EMC filters EMC required. These elements are:
 SMAIN: Main switch 32A or 40A (depending on the power): it breaks the supply on all the power live
conductors, neutral and controller 24M-circuit via an auxiliary contact. It does not break the supply
on the auxiliary circuit, nor on the lighting and sockets circuits.
 FF: 40 A, 300 mA type B power RCD (mandatory type for EN 81-20, optional and recommended for
EN 81-1)
 QF: Magneto-thermal switch of 16 A o 32 A for power, curve C (value according to power)
 FSM1, FSM2: 5 A fuses of controller
 FA: lighting RCD of 25 A, 30 mA, AC- type or A- type
 QAC: 6 A magneto-thermal switch for car lighting, curve C
 QAH: 10 A magneto-thermal switch for shaft lighting, curve C
 QTC: 10 A magneto-thermal switch for shaft sockets and machine room, curve C
 TCSM: Machine room socket
 FMA: EMC filter for circuits of lighting, controller and sockets
 FVEMC: EMC filter for power circuit
o 18 A: valid for 7.5 kW-inverter
o 32 A: valid for 11 kW and 15 kW-inverter
 Connections to be made at jobsite:
o SMAIN: Main switch, mains power circuit
o FA: RCD, lighting circuit
VERY IMPORTANT REMARK: THE LIGHTING CIRCUIT SHALL BE WIRED WITH
PHASE T (L3). OTHERWISE, THE ALIM BOARD RUN THE RISK OF DESTRUCTION
 Factory-made connections:
o XFMA1: Interconnection between block of boards, car lighting, sockets and controller
o XFMA2: Interconnection between block of boards and shaft lighting
o XFMA3: Interconnection between block of boards and shaft lighting
The figure shows the drawing of an electrical protection block for an installation up to 7.5 kW.
R S T N 24E 24S
T' N'
L1 L2 L3 L4
1 3 5 7 13
SMAIN
32A 2 4 6 8 14
T1 T2 T3 T4
1 N
FA
XALCAN:12
XALCAN:13
iID K 2P AC-type
230 V, 25A, 30mA
BN
BN
BN
BU
2 N
N 1 3 5 N 1
13 1 3 5 N
TCSM
FF FA 1 3 5 7
FF
iID 4P B-type
BN
BN
BU
BU
SMAIN 400 V, 40 A, 300 mA
14 2 4 6 N 2 4 6 8
N 2 4 6 N 2 FVEMC L1 L2 L3
BN
BN
BN
BU
/3.5:6
1 3 5 1 N 1 N 1 N 18A
FSM1
FSM2
12 34 56 78 Filtro de fuerza
1 N
1 N 1 N 1 N
1 3 5 QAC QAH QTC
QF QTC QAH QAC
QF iK60N 2P iK60N 2P iK60N 2P
3 2 1 iC60N 3P 10A C 10A C
6A C 2 N' 2 N' 2 N'
16A 415V
FVEMC
FMA 2 4 6
BN
2,5 BU
2,5 BN
BN
2N
BT
XFMA1 XFMA2 XFMA3
BN
2 4 6 2 N 2 N 2 N
FSM1
5A
5A
BN
FSM2
GNYE
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BU
BU
BU
BU
1 2 3
FMA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
XALVF
TCSM
2 1 4 3 6 5 1 2 1 2
XFMA1 XFMA3 XFMA2
V101 - 03/2017 25/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.2.5 Boards
This block consist of the control boards and the cable harnesses for interconnecting with the other blocks.
These elements are:
 ALIM board: board for the power feeds and the management of the auxiliary circuit
 MCB board: board for the controller management
 SASE board: board for safety chains and leveller function
 LINK board: GSM board
 PESO board: board for connecting the weighing cells, when the cells are located at the fixed point
(connector XPSPS)
 RCD for 110 VAC-circuit for car door operator F230
 RCD for 230 VAC-circuit of safety chain F110
RCD F110
ALIM board RCD F230
PESO board
MCB board
LINK board
SASE board
V101 - 03/2017 26/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

MTELecoGO_101_EN
XMCMN XMK1 XALDA
2 20 22 10 1 13 21 9 4 14 23 11 3 17 15 24 12 8 7 19 8 4 6 3 5 1 2 11 8 14 15 12 16 13 7 10 4 1 2 9 3
L24M
24M
24M
CHH
24MH
24MH
CHH
CMH
CMH
EN
0V
0V
0V
0V
24V
L95
L85
0V
DA2
DA1
24FA
0V
24GT
24MC
KP
KP
MF1
MF2
TM1
TM2
A2
LM1
LA1
A1
LM2
LA2
24B
CHL
CHL
CML
CML
XDRMCB
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
XMK1
XSMCM01
24MC
CHH
CHL
5 6 4
1 2 3 0V
4
CAH
24A
CAL
XSMIH01
FF1 XSMIH04
FF2
XALCAN
3 4
24BAT
Interconnection harness of the direct current circuit
0BAT
XALDA
DA2
DA1
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
24A
EA1
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
1 2 3 4
27/216
XDCAC1
WH
WH
+24GT
24MC
L24M
24CH
CANH
CMH
CHH
XALES
CAH
CANL
CML
CHL
24A
CAL
FF1
FF2
TM1
TM2
MF1
MF2
24V
0V
0V
LM1
LM2
24A
EA1
EN
LA1
LA2
0V
L95
L85
7 14 8 5 1 2 3 4 12 13 1 2 3 7
A2
A1
5 4 3 2 1 11 9 10 12 13 3 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
XALCAN XSMCM01 XDRMCB XALES XSASE6
XMCMN
 DRMCB: connector for frequency inverter
 XMK1: connector for block of contactors
 XALCAN, XALDA, XALES: connectors for ALIM board
XSASE6  XMCMN: connector for MCB board
 XSASE6: connector for SASE board
 FA: connector for power source
V101 - 03/2017
XSMCM01 XSMIH01 XSMIH03
L
N
 XDCAC1: connector for DC-AC converter
 XSMCM01: connector for travelling cable
24B 0B DA1 DA2 N F

FA XDCAC1  XSMIH01, XSMIH03: connectors for the shaft pre-wiring

XPM1 XPWK XMK2 XSASE2 XALTRM XPM6 XSASE3 XPM3

2 6 3 8 4 12 11 5 9 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 6 4 1 3 8 2 7 5 5 2 1 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 6 2 4 3 1 9 8 6 4 7 2 3 1 9
80H
70H
10H
60S
0VS
110VS
90B
41B
30B
20B
80B
40B
70B
60B
40C
90C
NM2
FM2
FM2
NM2
FAS
MTELecoGO_101_EN
FCS
0VS
0VS
0VS
RBF
NM1
FM1
+VRM
-VRM
-VRM
+VRM
NM2
FM2
FM2
NM2
FM2
NM2
+VRM
-VRM
110
A1K
A2K
-VFR
-VFR
A2K
A1K
K
+VFR
+VFR
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
BN
BN
BN
XPWK
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
2 4
XMK2 2 4
F220
F110 iID K 2P AC-type
230 V, 25A, 30mA
iID K 2P AC-type
WH
WH
WH
WH
230 V, 25A, 30mA
1 3
NM2
FM2
40R
80R
90R
41R
50R
30C
1 3
15 14 12 9 8 11 13 10
XFMA1 XFMA2
XSMCM01
XAL230
XALAH
Interconnection harness of the alternating current circuit
XALAC
XALTRM
28/216
XDCAC1
6 5 WH
Q110 XSMIH04
1 2
XPM1
FM3
NM3
Q220
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BN
BU
BU
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
+VRM
-VRM
NMC
NOA
NM1
NM0
NM4
NM3
FMC
NCA
TCN
TCN
FM1
FM0
FM4
FM3
RBF
RBF
TCF
TCF
RBF
FAS
FCS
FAF
FCF
NM
NH
NH
40H
41H
50H
30H
20H
80H
60H
70H
60H
10H
FM
NC
NC
NC
FH
FH
FC
FC
FC
5 4 6 3 2 1 5 2 1 4 9 12 8 11 3 6 7 10 1 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 7 3 1 2 4 5 6 11 10 9 12 13 5 7 6 8 14
XPM6 XALAH XAL230 XFMA1 XALAC XSMCM02 XFMA2 XSMIH02 XSMIH01
XPM3
 XPWK: connector for frequency inverter
 XMK2: connector for block of contactors
XSASE3  XFMA1, XFMA2: connectors for EMC filter
V101 - 03/2017
XSASE2  XAL230, XALAH, XALAC, XALTRM: connectors for ALIM board
 XPM1, XPM3, XPM6: connectors for command panel
XSMCM02 XSMIH04
 XSASE2, XSASE3: connectors for SASE board
 FA: connector for power source
 XDCAC1: connector for DC-AC converter
 XSMCM01, XSMCM02: connectors for travelling cable
 XSMIH01, XSMIH04: connectors for the shaft pre-wiring

 Harnesses for command panel
o XMC24 – XPM4: MCB board – command panel harness

o XAL24 – XPM2: ALIM board – command panel harness
XPM4 XPM2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FF2
IA
FBR
RUN
24FA
RES
K24B1
24FA1
24A
FSR
EX
NR
K24B
0V
BL
MES
MMS
BPN
0VDC
LBP
TEST
SUB
MMB
BAJ
24M
MM
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
K24B1
24FA1
0VDC
TEST
K24B
24FA
MMB
MMS
RUN
MES
24M
BPN
SUB
FBR
RES
FSR
24A
LBP
BAJ
FF2
MM
NR
EX
0V
BL
IA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
XMC24 XAL24
 Bypasses and terminal resistors

o XALPH: If there is no Audio board
o XSASE3: When the installation shall be EN 81-21 compliant
o XALCAN: Terminal resistor for auxiliary CAN on ALIM board
o XMCBT1: Terminal resistor for controller CAN on MCB board
PK CAH 3
X A L LK
x2 x1 OG CAL 1
1 3
1 2 0 O H M 1 /2 W
3 6
WH CAH 6
XALPH
CAH 5
2 5 X A LLK
CAL 3
X A LP H
WH CAL 2
X A LC A N
OG CHL 10
X A LC A N
x2 x1 PK CHH 9
10
1 2 0 O H M 1 /2 W 9
XM CBT2
XM CBT1
2 CBH PK x1 x2
XM CBT2 4 CBL OG
4 2 1 2 0 O H M 1 /2 W
2 CBH PK x1 x2
XM CBT1 4 CBL OG
4 2 1 2 0 O H M 1 /2 W
6
7 95 WH
XSASE3 8 2 00
XSASE3
1 2 3
V101 - 03/2017 29/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

XPM2 14
19 9
SME_TE
17
13
SME_TE
18 20 9
10 12
WH
WH
6
MTELecoGO_101_EN
XPM5
SBP
3/C4
SBP
10 11 WH 41B 6
BN
WH
7
WH
SBP
SBAJ
4/C2
3/C2
13 15 17 19 4/C1 2/C2 4/C4
5 WH 40B 3
SBP
3/C4
SSUB
SBAJ
8
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO
SALH
3/C2
4/C2
14 16 18 20 3/C1 1/C2 WH 90B 5
WH SSUB
4/C4
WH
XPM2 WH 30S 7
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
BN
BN
BN
+VRM
+VRM
-VRM
-VRM
NM2
NM1
NM2
FM2
FM1
FM2
RBF
FCS
FAS
41B
20B
40B
60B
70B
80B
90B
30S
200
95
96
99
9 5 11 12 7 8 1 4 6 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 3 9 1 2 8 4
XPM1 XPM6 XPM3
XPM5
24M 8
WH WH WH WH WH MM 4
3/C1 MMS 2
LFS
LIA
x2 x2
4/C1 MMB 1
SSUB
WH
WH
WH
x1 x1
2 1 5 7
10 2 3
LNR
3/C1
LFB
6 7 x2 x2
XPM4
SBP
SME_TE
SME_TE
SME_TE
4/C1 1 2 6 8
SBAJ
SIO
SIO
5 9 1 4 8 1 x1 x1
30/216
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
XPM4
K24B1
24FA1
0VDC
TEST
K24B
24FA
MMB
MMS
RUN
24M
MES
SUB
FBR
RES
FSR
24A
LBP
BPL
FF2
BAJ
MM
NR
0V
IA
1 6 5 13 9 11 14 10 2 3 12 4 8 1 7 8 6 12 2 5 4 11 9 10
This block consists of the following elements:
XPM2 XPM4
 SIO: Selector switch for switching ON, OFF and electromanual rescue by means of imbalance load
 SME_TE: Selector switch for emergency operation mode and TEST mode in commissioning
 SBP: BYPASS selector switch enablig the bypass of the door safety series in a safe way
 SALH: Changeover switch for shaft lighting
 LFB: Down button in MES mode. Other functions for TEST
V101 - 03/2017
 LFS: Up button in MES mode. Other functions for TEST
Command panel
 ALARMA: Alarm indicator inside the car

 NIVEL: Indicator for lift at level
 XPM1: Connection for the harness of the block of boards
 XPM2: Connection for the harness of ALIM board
 XPM4: Connection for the harness of MCB board
 XPM5: Connection for the assembly remote control
4.2.6
4.2.7 Power feeds
This block consists of the following elements:

 FA: Switched-mode power supply, 230 VAC – 24 VDC, 150 W 6.5 A
 DC-AC: Converter of 24 VDC – 230 VAC, 600 W
 BAT: 2 x 12 V – 5 Ah batteries
 FBAT: Fuse of batteries, 40 A
FUS
L N T -V -V +V +V
POW FAU
24B 0B DA1 DA2 F N

XDCAC1
DCAC
FA
A B DCAC
1 2
5A 4 BN
1:24B
+
2:0B
3:DA1
4 BN
4:DA2
5:N -
6:F
XDCAC1
1 2
BAT1 BAT2
FBAT 40A
BAT1 + - BAT2 + -
+ -
DCAC FA
V101 - 03/2017 31/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3 Electronic boards and devices

4.3.1 Elements of the Controller Circuit
4.3.1.1 MCB board
Figure 1 MCB board
DESCRIPTION: It is the board responsible for controlling and managing the controller functions. It centralises the
communication buses (controller, shaft and groups of lifts), except the auxiliary circuit bus which is connected to
the ALIM board. It is connected to the SASE board for controlling the safety chain.
LOCATION: Controller.
SETTING ITEMS: It does not include setting items.
DESCRIPTION OF CONNECTORS:
 XMC21: not used.
 XMC24: several inputs of 24V.
 XMCBT1: connection 1 for CAN-B communication circuit for group of lifts.
 XMCBT2: connection 2 for CAN-B communication circuit for group of lifts.
 XMCDB: console connection.
 XMCGN: configurable inputs/outputs.
 XMCMN: connection with ALIM board; shaft communication circuit, CAN-H, and others.
 XMCOP: connection of the controller communication circuit, CAN-M; car section.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: All the leds are green and controlled from the microprocessor.
If the board is supplied as a spare part and therefore the setting parameters of the controller are not loaded, all
the leds will be flashing when it is connected. As soon as the parameters are loaded, the information given by the
leds is detailed in the here below table:
ELEMENT DESCRIPTION STATE MEANING
ON OK
Communication with FLASHING 12 Failure. The cable is broken or not connected
LED DLGT
drive FLASHING 23 There is no device detected
OFF Board OFF or no firmware loaded
ON OK
FLASHING 1 Failure. The cable is broken or not connected
LED DLC Communication with car
FLASHING 2 There is no device detected
ON OK
Communication with FLASHING 1 Failure. The cable is broken or not connected
LED DLH
shaft FLASHING 2 There is no device detected
ON OK
Communication with
LED DLB FLASHING 1 Failure. The cable is broken or not connected
group of lifts
FLASHING 2 There is no MCB board detected
2 FLASHING 1 (QUICK): LED ON for 5 hundredths and OFF for 35 hundredths.

3 FLASHING 2 (SLOW): LED ON for 10 hundredths and OFF for 190 hundredths.
V101 - 03/2017 32/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


ON Normal mode
FLASHING 1 Maintenance mode / special operations
LED DLOK Controller mode
FLASHING 2 Failure in controller
BUZZER Audible indicator --- ----
IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES: This board does not have fuses. Nevertheless, it is
provided with 3 electronic relays (digital circuit-breakers), controlled by the microprocessor, enabling the power
supply of following circuits:
 Circuit for shaft supplying: 24MH
 Circuit for car supplying: 24MC
 Circuit for drive supplying: 24GT
These electronic relays detect short-circuit and over-current in the supplies they manage.
OTHER FUNCTIONS:
Weighing system. It is provided with a connection for load cells. It requires an additional board (PESO board).
4.3.1.2 INVERTER unit
Figure 2: INVERTER unit
DESCRIPTION: MP ecoGO INVERTER is a frequency converter especially designed for controlling lift gearless
machines with permanent magnet synchronous motor.
It incorporates functions and setting parameters providing unique features to a frequency inverter applied to the
lift. The inverter handling is quick, comfortable and intuitive. The benches of parameters include functions like: S
curves, stopping ramps, PI control, motor electronic protection, timers, control of external brake, output frequency
up to 65 Hz, output voltage regulation and monitoring of the output phases.
VERY IMPORTANT:
Never try to open the device nor to manipulate it. The converter contains high voltage capacitors that
may cause dangerous electrical shocks, even if the device is disconnected from mains supply.
LOCATION: It is locate on the controller, into the electrical cabinet
SETTING ITEMS: The setting is entirely carried out from the controller, whether through the Console MP ecoGO,
or the GUIA module via PC. There is no hardware item for setting inside the equipment itself.
V101 - 03/2017 33/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

XDRMCB: controller communication circuit, CAN-M, and 24V signals.
XENC: encoder connection.
XMCGN: output for motor power supply.
XPWDC: connection for harmonic filter.
XPWFR: connection for brake resistor.
XPWFT: input for mains voltage.
XPWMQ: connection of brake and other signals of 110 and 230 VAC.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: The MP ecoGO INVERTER device is not provided with leds external
information leds.
FUSES: It is not provided with fuses accessible from outside; there is only one power fuse and, if required, it has
to be replaced at the factory.
OTHER FUNCTIONS:
 PERFORMANCES
o Operation with emergency voltage, coming out from batteries or UPS, for Rescue operation. In this
mode, it detects the favourable direction for motion (associated to the load level) and it makes the
lift move, at low speed, up to the landing level.
o Absolute Positioning. The MP ecoGO INVERTER provides information about the car position to the
controller, on the basis of the machine encoder reading.
o Direct approach. The car moves at rated speed and starts decelerating continuously up to stopping,
thus the travel at low speed does not exist anymore.
o Pre-starting. Preliminary operation enabling the reduction of time for the lift starting to move.
o The Console MP ecoGO includes a list of typified synchronous machines, upgradeable. This enables
the automatic setting of the inverter parameters when selecting a particular machine.
o It is provided with a CAN-BUS communication interface for monitoring and commanding the inverter
in a remote way.
 COMFORT
o Position control at starting and stopping that eliminates the roll-back effect.
o Absence of electrical noises of motor, associated to switching frequencies of up to 15 kHz, in
synchronous motors. Thus it can be installed in MRL lifts.
o Improvement of the travel quality, thanks to the automatic adjustment of jerk during the starting
and stopping periods.
o Current filter of second order to eliminate the intrinsic resonance frequency of synchronous motors.
o Progressive starting. In installations with backpack frame, there is a kind of blow when starting
caused by the locking of the frame on the guide rails. This function makes possible to define a period
of time during which a constant acceleration will be applied in order to eliminate the blow felt inside
the car.
V101 - 03/2017 34/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.1.3 DOC unit
Figure 3: DOC Unit Figure 4: DOC board
DESCRIPTION: It the control board for any operator with frequency variation and single-phase supply (except for
synchronous operator).
LOCATION: It is located inside an independent box, next to the operator, on the car roof.
SETTING ITEMS: Bench of 6 microswitches.
Microswitches FUNCTION STATE FUNCTION

OFF OFF Operator 1
1
OFF ON Operator 2
Operator selection
ON OFF Operator 3
2
ON ON -
ON Positive logic
3 Photocell logic
OFF Negative logic
ON -
4 Not used
OFF -
ON -
5 Not used
OFF -
ON Photocell type NPN
6 Photocell type
OFF Photocell type PNP
 XOPC1: output for 230 VAC-power supply and voltage free signals.
 XOPC2, XOPC3: not used.
 XOPCAN: connection to controller communication circuit, CAN-M.
 XOPEA: connection of additional contact for car door closed.
 XOPF1, XOPF2: photocell connection 24 VDC.
 XOPFJ: connection of jamb arrows.
 XOPOP: input for 230 VAC-power supply.
 XOPSN: connection for contact of door reopening sensitiveness.
V101 - 03/2017 35/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS:
ON Normal (mains power)

LED DL24 Controller power supply FLASHING Error. Board damaged
OFF Without power supply
ON Communication OK
FLASHING 14 Failure. The cable is broken or not connected
LED DLC Communication
FUSES: It does not include fuses.
OTHER FUNCTIONS:
 Connection of final limit switches: E2, E3.
 Anti-pinch contact: E4.
 Additional contact: E5.
 Doors opening: A2 (NO contact Relay KA). Doors closing / Cam signal: B2 (NO contact Relay KB). These
signals are grouped on the same connector, next to AB1 (with common supply), FM3, NM3 (supply output
of the operator) and T.
 Additional signal 1: C1, C2; voltage free contact. Relay KC.
 Additional signal 2: D1, D2; voltage free contact. Relay KD.
 Sensitiveness contact for door re-opening: 24MC, E1.

V101 - 03/2017 36/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.1.4 CAR board
Figure 3 CAR board for LCD assembly
DESCRIPTION: It is the electronic board of the COP display. It integrates the connections for the pushbuttons
and other elements of the COP, as well as the emergency light.
The CAR board associated to the LCD display is able to show the following digits and symbols:
 2 digits for the position, consisting of 7-segment

 Motion direction by means of arrows
 Overload and weight by means of a progressive bar chart
 Out of service
 Lift in remote control mode
 Lift in maintenance mode
 Breakdown of lift
 Rescue in progress
 Firefighters operation
 Priority service (VIP)
Figure 4 Symbols and digits of the LCD screen
V101 - 03/2017 37/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Map of available characters for each digit of the LCD screen:
Figure 5: Character map

The connections for car items are the following:
 12 call pushbuttons (call + “registered call” signal).
 Doors opening and doors closing.
 4 inputs + 2 additional outputs.
 Connection for the alarm pushbutton.
LOCATION: COP
SETTING ITEMS: Jumper (JPASC2) for identifying COP 1 (non-connected) or COP 2 (connected)
 XDC01, XDC02… XDC12: connection for call pushbuttons.
 XDCA1, XDCA2… XDCA4: connection for auxiliary elements of COP.
 XDCAL: connection for alarm pushbutton.
 XDCAP: connection door opening pushbutton.
 XDCCAN: input for the controller communication circuit, CAN-M.
 XDCCMC: connection for the additional element of the controller communication circuit, CAN-M.
 XDCCP: connection door closing pushbutton.
 XDCDB: console connection.
 XDCPLF: connection for signals of REC board auxiliary circuit.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: the board is provided with 2 green leds having different functions
ON Power supply OK
DL24 Shaft supply FLASHING Board error status
ON Communication OK
Failure. The cable is broken or not
FLASHING 16
DLC Communications connected
FLASHING 27 MCB board not detected
IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES: Not applicable
OTHER FUNCTIONS: Sound indicator and emergency light, for the compliance of standard EN 81-20, section
5.4.10.4.
The following table shows the lighting data of the emergency light:
ELEMENT DESCRIPTION 1 m-distance 0,5 m-distance
Emergency light activated via

DL5 5 lux 19 lux
the voltage input PLF
ACCESSORIES: It is supplied with a black frame and a protection screen made of polycarbonate.

V101 - 03/2017 38/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.1.5 SASE board
DESCRIPTION: Board containing the safety chain

circuits, including connections, readings and releveller
LOCATION: Controller
SETTING ITEMS: It does not include setting items
Figure 6 SASE board
 XSASE1: connection with MCB board.

 XSASE2: beginning and end of the safety chain and activation of contactors.
 XSASE3: different points of the safety chain.
 XSASE4: connection with ALIM board.
Voltage presence at the safety chain beginning, (110

ON
LED 00 Beginning of the safety chain Vs).
OFF Voltage presence at the safety chain end, (110 Vs).
ON Safety chain of breakdowns closed.
LED 40 Safety chain of breakdowns
OFF Safety chain of breakdowns open.
ON Safety chain of maintenance closed.
LED 60 Safety chain of maintenance
OFF Safety chain of maintenance open.
Safety chain for presence of landing ON Safety chain for presence of landing doors closed.
LED 70
doors OFF Safety chain for presence of landing doors open.
ON Safety chain of landing door locks closed.
LED 80 Safety chain of landing door locks
OFF Safety chain of landing door locks open.
Intermediate point between the two contacts KN1, KN2
Intermediate point between the two ON relays in the leveller circuit for bypassing the safety
contacts KN1, KN2 relays in the chain of doors closed.
LED 85
leveller circuit for bypassing the Intermediate point between the two contacts KN1, KN2
safety chain of doors OFF relays in the leveller circuit for bypassing the safety
chain of doors open.
Safety chain of car doors, ON Safety chain of car doors, presences and locks closed.
LED 90
presences and locks OFF Safety chain of car doors, presences and locks open.
Final point of safety chain, after
LED 95 ON Final point of safety chain, after KN2 is closed.
KN2
FUSES: None OTHER FUNCTIONS: it does not apply
V101 - 03/2017 39/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.1.6 Landing displays

FOR DISPLAY OF 2.8 INCHES:
Figure 7: Display DMG 2.8 inches
DESCRIPTION: Display based on TFT technology, it is provided with a 2.8 inch screen and 320x240 pixel
resolution.
It is also provided with CAN bus connection, adapted to CAN OPEN protocol of MP.
LOCATION: LOP
SETTING ITEMS: It is equipped with a setting program, via Micro USB connection.
It enables you to display simultaneously a maximum of 3 digits per screen and the UP/DOWN arrow.
Map of available characters for each digit:
Figure 8: Map of characters
+, -: power supply.
CAN_H, CAN_L: Controller communication circuit CAN-M.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: It does not include information LEDS.
IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES: It does not include protection elements.
OTHER FUNCTIONS: It is provided with built-in GONG, activated via CAN communication.
Should you need further information, refer to the technical sheet of the product DK3RFC00M.F -
Display TFT Raffaello 2,8".
V101 - 03/2017 40/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FOR DISPLAY OF 4.3 INCHES:
Figure 9: Display DMG 4.3 inches
DESCRIPTION: Display based on TFT technology, it is provided with a 4.3 inch screen and 480x272 pixel
resolution.
It is also provided with CAN bus connection, adapted to CAN OPEN protocol of MP.
LOCATION: LOP.
SETTING ITEMS: It is equipped with a setting program, via Micro USB connection.
It enables you to display simultaneously a maximum of 3 digits per screen and the UP/DOWN arrow.
Map of available characters for each digit:
Figure 10: Map of characters
+, -: power supply.
CAN_H, CAN_L: Controller communication circuit CAN-M.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: None.

IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES: None.
OTHER FUNCTIONS: It is provided with built-in GONG, activated via CAN communication.
Should you need further information, refer to the technical sheet of the product DK3RFC00M.F -
Display TFT Raffaello 4.3.
V101 - 03/2017 41/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.1.7 LOB unit
Figure 11: LOB board
DESCRIPTION: The LOB unit consists of the LOB board and a box for protection against water and dust. It is the
element enabling the connection of the LOPs to the shaft communication series CAN-H.
Each LOB board provides service to a maximum 4 LOPs and supports the connection of the following elements per
LOP:
Call item (pushbutton /key switch): 2 pcs.
Additional item (key switch):1 pc.
UP and Down arrows.
Light indicator: 1 pc.
Door contact: 1 pc.
LOCATION: It is located into the shaft, next to the trunking.
SETTING ITEMS: It is provided with a bench of 8 switches
MICROSWITCHES STATE FUNCTION

ON Enables the setting via microswitches
1 Enables the setting via MCB board
OFF
(it does not take into account the microswitches from 2 to 8)
ON LOB used for providing service to a display
2
OFF LOB used for providing service to 4 LOPs
ON Identification LOB board number, in binary mode
3
OFF (3: OFF, 4: OFF, 5: OFF, 6: OFF): LOB 1 board for providing service to
ON LOPs 1-4
4
OFF (3: ON, 4: OFF, 5: OFF, 6: OFF): LOB 2 board for providing service to
ON LOPs 5-8
5
OFF …………………….
ON (3: ON, 4: ON, 5: ON, 6: ON): LOB 16 board for providing service to
6 LOPs 30-32
OFF
ON
7
OFF
No used yet
ON
8
OFF
V101 - 03/2017 42/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

XLBB1, XLBB2, XLBB3, XLBB4: main connections of LOPs 1, 2, 3, 4.
XLBC1, XLBC2, XLBC3, XLBC4: additional contacts for doors 1, 2, 3, 4.
XLBCAN: shaft communications circuit, CAN-H.
XLBD12, XLBD34: not used.
XLBL1, XLBL2, XLBL3, XLBL4: additional connections of LOPs 1, 2, 3, 4.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: the board is provided with 2 leds having different functions:

Green LED for shaft
L24MH FLASHING Failure. Board damaged
power supply indicator
OFF Without power supply
ON Communication OK
Failure. The cable is broken or not
FLASHING 18
LCAN Communication connected
FUSES: None.
OTHER FUNCTIONS: Reading of input voltage 24MH for controlling the minimum power supply required for a
proper operation
4.3.1.8 PESO board
Figure 12 PESO board
DESCRIPTION: Board for weight Reading by means of the load cell connection.
LOCATION: it is located on the MCB or REV board (exclusively on one them).
SETTING ITEMS: None.
XPSSC: connection to MCB or REV board.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: None.

FUSES: None.
OTHER FUNCTIONS: It does not apply.

V101 - 03/2017 43/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.1.9 GUIA unit
Figure 13 Conjunto GUIA
DESCRIPTION: It is the unit for integrating the console into the electrical controller.
It consists of a visual interface incorporating the following functions:
 Assembly and commissioning
 Monitoring of the installation
 Parametrisation
 Maintenance
 Detection and trouble solution
 It is provided with 4.3”-TFT screen and a resolution of 480 x 272 pixels
LOCATION: Car roof.

XCAN: controller communication circuit, CAN-M
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: None

OTHER FUNCTIONS:
Ethernet connectivity for being used as remote control.
microSD card to load contents.
V101 - 03/2017 44/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.2 Elements of the Auxiliary Circuit
4.3.2.1 ALIM board
Figure 14: ALIM board
DESCRIPTION: The ALIM board is responsible for analysing, controlling and dispatching the different supplies of
the installation. In addition, it is the master board of the auxiliary circuit.
XAL230: 230 VAC power supplies and signals.
XAL24: 24 VDC inputs and outputs.
XALAC: 230 VAC additional power supply.
XALAH: power supply for shaft lighting.
XALCAN: shaft communication circuit, CAN-H.
XALDA: various inputs and outputs.
XALES: configurable inputs and outputs.
XALLK: LINK board connection to the auxiliary circuit communications, CAN-A.
XALPH: additional element connection of the auxiliary circuit communications, CAN-A.
XALTRM: power supply of safety chain.
XALVF: connection for analysing the electrical grid.
XALVT: connection for the electrical cabinet fan.

LED DLACF Controller power supply
OFF Emergency supply (batteries)
ON Controller operating
LED DLMCF Controller state
OFF Controller OFF
ON OK
FAILURE. The LED flashing sequence will show the
State of the power tens and the ones of the failure code occurred
LED DLPSF* FLASHING
supplies (refer to the table in chapter “Information about
the state of supplies”)
OFF Board OFF
ON OK
Communication with the FLASHING 110 Failure. The cable is broken or not connected
LED DLCH
MCB board FLASHING 211 MCB board not detected
OFF Board OFF or power-saving activated
ON OK
Auxiliary circuit FLASHING 1 Failure. The cable is broken or not connected
LED DLCA
communication FLASHING 2 There is no device detected
OFF Board OFF or power-saving activated
TRANSDUCER Deactivated ---- ----

V101 - 03/2017 45/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

* FLASHING COMPLETE SEQUENCE OF DLPSF LED:
Quick flashing  LED OFF  no. of flashings corresponding to the tens  Led OFF  no. of flashings
corresponding to the ones
IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES:
FUSE CURRENT CIRCUIT PROTECTED
FLIM 1A It protects the output FM3 / NM3
F230 3.15 A It protects the output FM1 / NM1

FRM 3.15 A It protects the output FM5 / NM5
It protects the output 110Vs / 0Vs. In the event an external transformer

F110 0.2 A is used, F110 will be of 2A and it will be placed on the transformer itself,
not on the board.
It protects the battery charging (it does not affect the discharging circuit
F24B 1A
of batteries)
F24M 5A It protects the output of 24M
F24A 1A It protects the supply of 24A
IMPORTANT:
The fuses are located on the phases. Thus, when carrying out the wiring, be careful to prevent any reverse
of Phase and Neutral at any connector. Otherwise, the board may be destructed.
OTHER FUNCTIONS: In addition, the ALIM board is responsible for the functions of monitoring the supplies and
the phases, but also managing the battery charging, the modes of LEVEL 1 and 2 standby, the control of cabinet
temperature, the manual rescue, or the levelling function.
V101 - 03/2017 46/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.2.2 LINK board
DESCRIPTION: Digital communication module 2G GSM/GPRS integrating the voice service, required for alarm
calls of the user, and the data service, as well as the lift connection to the sigma4lifts servers.
The data service, as well as the lift connection to the sigma4lifts servers.
The LINK board is provided with a digital audio interface, on CAN-BUS, enabling up to 10 modules to be connected
at the same time. At least a TEL board (audio module in car for MP ecoGO controller) shall be connected for a
proper operation.
SETTING ITEMS:
Microswitches FUNCTION STATE VALUE

Enables the communication the ON Activated
1
sigma4lifts servers. (1) OFF Deactivated
ON Activated
2 Not used
OFF Deactivated
Enables the mode of coverage ON Activated
3
information (2) OFF Deactivated
ON Activated
4 Enables the writing on microSD.
OFF Deactivated
(1) The LINK board allows the connection to sigma4lifts service, by using the SIM card provided by MP and which
has a voice and data flat rate. The microswitch 1 allows the activation or deactivation of this connection, but it
does not change the administrative status of the SIM card contract (subscription / termination).
(2) It allows you to use the 5 LEDs of the LINK board as indicators of the GSM/GPRS power received by the LINK
board.
XLK1: connection to the communication circuit of auxiliary circuit and group circuit, CAN-A and CAN-B.
XLK2, XLK3: not used.
V101 - 03/2017 47/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 Normal operation mode

ON Power supply OK
FLASHING Board in error situation
L24A Auxiliary circuit supply
Board switched off or energy-saving mode
OFF
activated
ON OK
FLASHING 112 Error. Cable broken or not connected
Communication of
LCA FLASHING 213 No device detected
auxiliary circuit
OFF
activated
ON OK
Communication of
LCB FLASHING 2 No device detected
group of lifts
OFF
activated
OFF No GSM/GPRS network connection
GREEN: ON Voice mode. Connected to GSM network
GREEN: FLASHING 1 Voice mode. Ongoing call
LST GSM/GPRS state BLUE: ON Data mode. Connected to GRPS network
BLUE: FLASHING 1 Data mode. Ongoing transfer of data
RED: FLASHING 1 Error preventing the device operation
RED: FLASHING 2 Situation of low battery
RED: ON No GSM/GPRS network connection
Low level of coverage. The operation in voice
RED: FLASHING 1
mode nor data mode is not guaranteed
Middle level of coverage. Enough for making
LCOB GSM/GPRS coverage
BLUE: ON voice calls, but it does not allow the connection
to the data network
High level of coverage. The proper operation
GREEN: ON
both in voice mode and data mode is guaranteed
 Coverage information operation mode:
ELEMENT STATE MEANING

LCA ON Insufficient level of coverage 14
Minimum level of coverage. Enough for making voice calls, but
LCA +LCB ON
it does not allow the connection to the data network 14
Low level of coverage. Enough for making voice calls, but it
LCA +LCB+LCOB ON
does not allow the connection to the data network 14
LCA +LCB+LCOB +LST ON Middle level of coverage
LCA +LCB+LCOB +LST+ L24A ON High level of coverage
FUSES: it does not apply.
OTHER FUNCTIONS:
 The LINK board requires a microSD card for operating with the sigma4lifts data servers. The minimum capacity
of the card shall be 1 Gb and it shall mandatory be formatted in FAT16 mode.
 The LINK board can properly work without the microSD card. The voice service will not be affected, but its
operation with sigma4lifts servers will be reduced to a very basic kit of functions.
SIM card
 The LINK board requires a SIM card, miniSIM format, for operating. MP supplies to the clients a SIM card with
voice and data flat rate, allowing voice calls in the alarm situation and the connection to sigma4lifts service.
 For those who do not want the sigma4lifts service, the operation with miniSIM cards which are not supplied by
MP is possible. In this situation, the client shall ensure that the SIM card used is provided with 2G connectivity.
Antenna
The LINK board is provided with a GSM/GPRS antenna, dual band (900 and 1800 MHz). The gain of this antenna is
enough for the operation in most installations. If the coverage level received by the LINK board is too low, we
recommend to replace the standard antenna by a high-gain antenna (available at our SERVICEnter).

14 We recommend to use a higher-gain antenna.
V101 - 03/2017 48/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.2.3 TEL board
DESCRIPTION: Module for digital audio, responsible for the functions of telephone, intercom, voice synthesizer
and piped music player, inside the lift car.
It is provided a digital audio interface on CAN-BUS, enabling the interaction with all the other audio modules of the
lift, when it works in intercom mode, and together with the LINK board for communicating with the outdoor from
the lift, via GSM.
It includes a microphone a loudspeaker, as well as information LEDs, according to Standard EN 81-28.
LOCATION: COP.
SETTING ITEMS:
Microswitches FUNCTION STATE VALUE

ON TEL2
1 Identifier of car TEL board (1)
OFF TEL1
ON Only synthesizer mode
2 Operation mode (2)
OFF Full operation 15
ON Connected
3 Induction loop
OFF Not connected
ON ---
4 Not yet assigned
OFF ---
(1) A maximum of 2 TEL board per lift can be connected (ex: double car COP). Each TEL board shall have its own
car identifier.
(2) The TEL board can be set to work exclusively as a voice synthesizer.
XTLALT: internal loudspeaker connection.
XTLBUC: connection of magnetic induction loop or external loudspeaker.
XTLCAC: connection to auxiliary circuit communications, CAN-A.
XTLES1, XTLES2, XTLES3: additional elements connection of COP 1, 2, 3.
XTLPLF: auxiliary circuit signals of COP.
15 It works as a telephone, a synthesizer and an intercom at the same time.
V101 - 03/2017 49/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ON OK
Power supply of auxiliary FLASHING Board in error situation
LED DL24
circuit
OFF
activated
ON OK
Communication of auxiliary
LED DLC FLASHING 217 No device detected
circuit
OFF
activated
Group of green LEDs
Enlightened when there is an accepted alarm
DLV1..DLV4 associated to the accepted ON
call, according to standard EN 81-28.
alarm pictogram
Group of yellow LEDs
Enlightened when there is an ongoing alarm
DLA1..DLA4 associated to the ongoing ON
call, according to standard EN 81-28.
alarm pictogram
Group of red LEDs
DLR1..DLR4 associated to the general ON Not used
alarm pictogram
Group of red LEDs
associated to the pictogram Enlightened when the brake opens during the
DLR5..DLV8 ON
of rescue by means of rescue by means of imbalance load
imbalance load
IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES: It does not apply.
OTHER FUNCTIONS:
 microSD card
The TEL board requires a microSD card for operating as a voice synthesizer. The minimum capacity of the card
shall be 1 Gb and it shall mandatory be formatted in FAT16 mode. After the card has been formatted or
replaced by a new one, the audio files related to the voice synthesizer shall be reloaded.
The TEL board can also work properly without the microSD card. The operation as telephone terminal and
intercom will not be affected, but the operation as a voice synthesizer will not be enabled.
 Loudspeaker
The TEL board is supplied with a main loudspeaker. A second one can be added by connecting it to the a la
XLTBUC special terminal. This terminal can also be used to connect an induction loop for hearing-impaired
people.
The loudspeaker shall have the following features:
o Impedance: 8 Ω
o Power: 2 W

V101 - 03/2017 50/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.3 Elements of mixed-use

4.3.3.1 CANx2 board
DESCRIPTION: it is the board responsible for the opening of the communication

BUS, enabling other boards to be inserted.
The board is provided with an input for communication and two outputs to devices
or other boards. In this way, it enables the number of devices connected to the
communication BUS to be extended. There is no limit in number for CANx2 boards
to be connected.
LOCATION: Car roof.
Figure 15 CANx2 board
XCNx2: connection to the main circuit of communications.
XCx2-1: connection to the secondary circuit of communications number 1.
XCx2-2: connection to the secondary circuit of communications number 2.
IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES: It does not include protection elements.
OTHER FUNCTIONS: Adapted to be fitted into the DIN rail. It is provided with coding key to make the difference
between the circuits.
4.3.3.2 MUXCAN board
DESCRIPTION: the MUXCAN board has two

operation modes, selectable by making a bypass
between terminal XMXFIX and terminal XMXA or
XMXB.
When the bypass is made onto position XMXA, the

MUXCAN board behaves like a CAN-BUS
multiplexer. It is provided with two independent
CAN-BUS ports for input which are multiplexed into
one output port. The output port traffic is
retransmitted to the two input ports.
The MUXCAN board power supply is obtained from
any input port and directly goes to the output.
The XMXA mode will be used when the same LINK
board shall give support to up to 4 lifts. Every 2 lifts
a MUXCAN board will be used.
When the bypass is made onto position XMXB, the

MUXCAN board behaves like a CAN-BUS repeater
element. The input port traffic is retransmitted to
the output port and vice versa. The MUXCAN board
power supply is obtained from the output port and
it is distributed to the input ports.
The XMXB operation mode will be used when a
CAN-BUS longer than 100 metres is required. In
this situation, a MUXCAN board will be used to increase the BUS the outreach.
V101 - 03/2017 51/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

SETTING ITEMS:
MICROSWITCH POLE FUNCTION VALUE
ON: Mode A - Multiplexer

1 Selector mode
OFF: Mode B - Repeater
2 Not used -
SWPAR
3 Not used -
4 Not used -
ON: Enables the transparent
mode
0000 Transparent mode – without CAN filter
OFF: Disables the transparent
mode
ON: In a group of lifts, it
SWFUN enables the connection of
(1-2-3-4) 0001 LINK for group of lifts several TEL boards to the
same LINK board
OFF: Function deactivated
0010 Not used -
0011 Not used -
MICROSWITCH POLE FUNCTION VALUE
0: Port disabled
1 Enabled
1: Port enabled
SWCS
0: 125 kbps
2 Port speed
1: 500 kbps
0: Port disabled
1 Enabled
1: Port enabled
SWCE1
0: 125 kbps
2 Port speed
1: 500 kbps
1 Enabled 0: Port disabled
SWCE2 0: Port disabled
2 Port speed
1: Port enabled
JUMPER FUNCTION VALUE
Put: Terminal resistor

Connection jumper for terminal resistor of 120 Ω on output connected.
JP0
CAN (XMXOUT). Removed: Terminal resistor
not connected.
Connection jumper for terminal resistor of 120 Ω on input 1 connected.
JP1
CAN (XMXE1). Removed: Terminal resistor
not connected.
Connection jumper for terminal resistor of 120 Ω on input 2 connected.
JP2
CAN (XMXE2). Removed: Terminal resistor
not connected.
XMXA: bypass connector for selecting the operation in multiplexer mode.

XMXB: bypass connector for selecting the operation in repeater mode.
XMXE1: connection to communication series number 1.
- In multiplexer operation mode (bypass XMXFIX-XMXA), it is one of the input series.
- In repeater operation mode (bypass XMXFIX-XMXB), it is the output series (similar to the XMXE2 one).
XMXE2: connection to communication series number 2.
- In multiplexer operation mode (bypass XMXFIX-XMXA), it is one of the input series.
- In repeater operation mode (bypass XMXFIX-XMXB), it is the output series (similar to the XMXE1 one).
XMXFIX: bypass common connector for selecting the operation mode.
XMXLOOP: input of communication series number 3.
XMXOUT: output of communication series number 3.
- In multiplexer operation mode (bypass XMXFIX-XMXA), XMXLOOP and XMXOUT offer the output series.
- In repeater operation mode (bypass XMXFIX-XMXB), XMXLOOP and XMXOUT require the input series.
V101 - 03/2017 52/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: Normal operation mode:
DLC24 LED L1 for power supply ON OK

ON OK
LED for communication of
DLC0 FLASHING 219 No device detected
the output CAN
OFF
activated
ON OK
DLC1 FLASHING 2 No device detected
the input XMXE1 CAN
OFF
activated
ON OK
DL2 FLASHING 2 No device detected
the input XMXE2 CAN
OFF
activated
REMARK: The LEDs will be lit in blue when the CAN setting is 500 kbps (auxiliary circuit CAN). When the CAN port
is set to 125 kbps, the LEDs will be lit in green.
4.3.3.3 REV board
DESCRIPTION: Board allowing the integration in a common space of all the interconnections that shall be carried
out on the car roof of the lift, between the travelling cable and the car elements.
It is provided with 2 independent control circuits, Controller Circuit and Auxiliary Circuit, in such a way it has
functions of both circuits and a full autonomy in standby mode.

V101 - 03/2017 53/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

It is provided with separate areas of connection depending on the use / function which are described hereafter:
Connections of travelling cable:
 Inputs of safety chain
 230V AC power supply of Controller / lighting
 Controller CAN and Auxiliary CAN communications
 Telephone line
Connections of power:
 Connections of safety chain
 Connections of Controller power supply
 Connections of lighting
Connections of control:
 Controller CAN for operator (where there are two operators, it might be used together with a
CANx2 board)
 Auxiliary CAN (where there are two audio outputs, it might be used together with a CANx2 board)
 Filtering of emergency calls
 Positioning sensors
 Additional power supply
 Inputs / outputs for Controller / Auxiliary circuits
Connections to COP:
 Controller CAN (where there are two COPs, it might be used together with a CANx2 board)
 Auxiliary CAN (where there are two emergency telephones, it might be used together with a
CANx2 board)
 Control of the emergency lighting
 Telephone line
 Filtering of calls for activating the emergency telephone
LOCATION: Car roof
XRV21: Not used.
XRV230T: 230 Vac-generic power supply for lighting.
XRV24: input for additional 24V-power source.
XRVAC: connection for safety gear contact.
XRVARFL: connection for alarm pushbutton located under the car.
XRVARP1, XRVARP2: connection for contact of full open car door 1, 2.
XRVBR: connection for contact of folding balustrade.
XRVCAC: connection for COP on communication series of the auxiliary circuit, CAN-A.
XRVCAM: connection for CAN-M and CAN-A of travelling cable.
XRVCAU: connection for intercom on communication series of the auxiliary circuit, CAN-A.
XRVCMC: connection for COP on communication series of the controller circuit, CAN-M.
XRVDB: connection for console.
XRVDOC1, XRVDOC2: connection for operator 1, 2 communication series of the controller circuit, CAN-M.
XRVEA: connection for elements of the connection box.
XRVEC1, XRVEC2: connection for car locking contact 1, 2.
XRVESA: configurable inputs/outputs of auxiliary circuit.
XRVESM: configurable inputs/outputs of controller circuit.
XRVFIN: connection for final limit switch.
XRVHC: car lighting.
XRVHTC: connection for light on the car roof.
XRVIL: connection for level positioner switch.
XRVIPS: connection for auxiliary up positioner switch.
XRVIPB: connection for auxiliary down positioner switch.
XRVIR: connection for safety area positioner switch.
XRVLT: input for analogue phone line.
XRVLT1: output for analogue phone line.
XRVLV: power supply for electric cam 230 Vac.
XRVMR: connection for inspection mode command.
XRVOP1, XRVOP2: 230 Vac power supply for operators 1, 2.
XRVPC1, XRVPC2: connection for contacts of doors 1, 2.
XRVPS: connection for PESO board.
XRVSS: connection for safety chain of travelling cable.
XRVTC: connection for 230 Vac-circuits of travelling cable.
XRVTE: power supply for socket.
XRVTF: activation of analogue telephone.
XRVTPB: connection for additional STOP switch.
XRVVT: Fan poser supply.
V101 - 03/2017 54/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ON Power supply OK
DL24M Controller power supply FLASHING Board in failure situation
OFF Board OFF or energy-saving mode activated
ON OK
Controller circuit FLASHING 120 Error. Cable broken or not connected
DLCM
communication FLASHING 221 MCB board not detected
ON Power supply OK
Auxiliary circuit power
DL24A FLASHING Board in failure situation
supply
ON OK
Auxiliary circuit FLASHING 1 Error. Cable broken or not connected
DLCA
communication FLASHING 2 MCB board not detected
IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTIONS OF THE FUSES:
NAME DESCRIPTION VALUE

FCAB Output fuse for Controller power supply to car 1A
FCABA Output fuse for Auxiliary power supply to car 1.6 A
FPOS Fuse for power supply to standard positioner 500 mA
FOP Output fuse for power supply to operators 2A
Output fuse for power supply to boards of AUDIO and/or additional elements of
FAUDIO 1A
Auxiliary CAN
FAUXA Output fuse for Power supply of configurable inputs/outputs 500 mA
FAUX Output fuse for Power supply of configurable inputs/outputs / optional positioning 500 mA
FCAM Output fuse for cam power supply 3.15 A
FMIO Output fuse for power supply to MIO board / absolute positioning / inspection command 1A
FDOC Output fuse to operator board (DOC) 1A
OTRAS FUNCIONES:
In addition, the REV board is provided with a series of extra functions:
 Speed measure via triaxial accelerometers: the lift car motions submit the board to accelerations which
are used by these devices to calculate the car speed. As they are three-dimensional devices, the board
placement in space has an impact on the reading. Thus, the REV board shall only be placed on the
horizontal plane or on the vertical plane.
 “Gong” function: sound signal consisting of three sounds, associated to the motion direction of the lift.
The REV board incorporates the “gong” function, but no loudspeaker. The latter shall be separately
supplied.
 “Alarm” function: sound signal associated to the alarm system. The “gong” function and the “alarm”
function share the loudspeaker.
 Monitoring of voltages of car elements: the REV board provides power supply to the different
electronic/electric elements placed into the car. There is a reading associated to the voltages of these
circuits, 24MC, 24A and 24FE allowing the monitoring.
 Internal connections for MP ecoGO Console and PESO board.

V101 - 03/2017 55/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.3.4 POS unit
DESCRIPTION: Sensor based on Hall technology, which is part of the positioning system.
In order to guarantee the proper reading of the signal, the magnet shall be placed at a distance lower than 20 mm
and it shall be centred with the sensor.
LOCATION: Car roof.
XPOS: connection to REV board.
OTHER FUNCTIONS: It is provided with a tool for fixing to the car.
4.3.3.5 Pushbuttons and other elements of IMPULSE series

All the elements belonging to the IMPULSE series assembled with an MP ecoGO controller are provided with a
specific PCB for MP ecoGO version. If they are assembled with any other controller, the PCB is another one.
IDENTIFICATION OF THE COMPONENTS:
PUSHBUTTON KEY SWITCH EUROCYLINDER ARROWS LIGHT

INDICATOR
DESCRIPTION: Range of compatible pushbuttons and elements belonging to the IMPULSE series, designed to be
used in COPs and LOPs.
They can be fixed on plates of plates with thickness from 1.5 to 4 mm.
Connections via plug-in and screwed type terminals, specific for MP ecoGO controller.
Possibilities of lighting and colours:

 Single light option, with recall light by lighting the contour. Blue or white lamps.
 “Dual light” option with the identifying element lit in white and the contour lit in blue.
Elements of IMPULSE series in MP ecoGO version:

 Pushbutton with single / dual light.
 Special pushbutton for landing (provided with buzzer, for sound record, and connecting elements).
 Key switch
 Eurocylinder Key switch
 Light indicator
 Arrow
For more information about the product, refer to the technical sheet FTELIMPULSE.
LOCATION: COP and LOP.
V101 - 03/2017 56/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

SETTING ITEMS
In the IMPULSE series, some elements are provided with a setting switch / jumper. Its function is the following
one:
Dual light pushbutton:
 Alarm:
The identifying element and the contour are separately lit (the recording signal lights the
identifying element and the call signal lights the contour).
 Single light:
The identifying element and the contour are simultaneously lit (the recording signal lights the
identifying element and the contour; the call signal lights the contour only).
 Record light plus permanent light:
The identifying element is permanently lit, as long as there is power supply, and the contour is
lit via both the call signal and the recording signal.
Key switch / Eurocylinder key switch: It is provided with a setting for the open / closed contact.
For more information, refer to the technical sheet FTELIMPULSE.
Call pushbutton / key switch / Eurocylinder key switch:
XP: connection to CAR board or to special landing pushbutton.
Special landing pushbutton:

XP: connection to LOP harness.
XP1: connection to additional landing pushbutton.
XP2: connection to landing key switch.
Light indicators / arrows:

X1: connection to LOP harness or main indicator.
X2: connection to secondary indicator.
INFORMATION LEDS AND OTHER SIGNALS: It does not apply.

V101 - 03/2017 57/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5 ASSEMBLY AND CONNECTION. PARTIAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

5.1 Assembling the ALL-IN MRL electrical cabinet
There are several ways for assembling the ALL-IN MRL. You shall bear in mind that the cable inlet is carried out
via the top part and also via the bottom part of the cabinet. This is the reason why the civil work shall be adapted
by creating niches for housing the protections of cable inlet and to redirect them. When the bottom niche is
feasible, a plinth can be placed for the inlet of cables.
Another important characteristic is that all the cabinets have a right opening of 180º, whether they are placed on
the right side or on the left side of the landing doors.
Warning: before starting the cabinet assembly, check all the information included into the lift layout drawings.
A=350
A=350
Figure 16:
STANDARD ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY WITH PLINTH
* FOR STANDARD STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES (X02) A=352 mm

* FOR SPECIAL STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A = 354 mm B= 100, 200 or 300 mm
V101 - 03/2017 58/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Therefore, the assembly depends on the following variables:
 Assembly next to shaft (on a shaft enclosure wall)

o Fixed to the door frame
 Doors of 2000 mm height-clear opening
 This is the most common case, where the cabinet is fixed on one side to the door frame
and on the other one, by means of attachment claws, to the wall enclosure, as shown
below in the figure.
 Doors of 2100 mm height-clear opening
The fixing way is like the previous one, excepting that the cabinet is mounted up on a
plinth, in such a way, it is levelled with the door.
o Not fixed to the door frame
In this case, the fixing is carried out by means of claws on both sides.
 Assembly non-next to shaft

In this case, the cabinet is not part of the shaft enclosure, and it requires a plinth for enabling the cable inlet. It
the same plinth used when the height of landing doors is different from the cabinet height.
5.1.1 Assembly next to shaft

5.1.1.1 Outlet of cables on the top part and bottom part of the cabinet
Both the top outlet and the bottom inlet of cables will be provided with an additional component which mission will
be to path the cables from the controller to the shaft, offering two types of protection: on the one hand, protection
against fire, by means of an intumescent element, and, on the other hand, protection against water dropping on
the top part.
TOP FIXING
CLAW FOR SIDE FIXING
STANDARD BOTTOM FIXING
T2, T3 y C4 C2
SUPPORT POSITIONING
ACCORDING TO THE PANEL TYPE
V101 - 03/2017 59/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.1.1.2 Niches for the outlet of cables on the top part and bottom part of the cabinet
The dimensions of the niches depend on the location and assembly of the cabinet (next or not to the shaft,
whether there is door overhang or not). The required information is on the layout drawings of the complete lift.
ROUTE THE CABLES THROUGH THE BOTTOM PROTECTION FOR CABLE

OUTLET, BEFORE INSERTING THEM INTO THE CABINET
PROTECTION FOR CABLE OUTLET
V101 - 03/2017 60/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.1.1.3 Plinth for doors which height is different from 2160 mm

When the clear opening of the landing doors is different from 2160 mm, the cabinet height does not coincide with
the door height. For the cabinet to be levelled with the door, a plinth has been defined up on which the cabinet is
supported and the height difference is compensated. Therefore, the bottom outlet of cables is modified, but the
top outlet is exactly like without plinth.
SCREWS FOR FIXING THE PLINTH COVER
PLINTH COVER
INSIDE BASE OF CABINET
V101 - 03/2017 61/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.1.2 Assembly non-next to shaft

5.1.2.1 Outlet of cables on the top part and bottom part of the cabinet
When the cabinet is not part of the shaft enclosure, the cables also come out though the bottom and top parts.
Therefore, they shall be appropriately protected. For the bottom part, a plinth will be placed to make easier the
cable outlet, similar to the one of previous section. For the top part, there is no need for any supplement to be
placed.
5.1.2.2 Conduits to the shaft

The standards on electromagnetic compatibility require that the conduits to the shaft of the cables coming out
from the top part and the ones coming out from the bottom part are routed through different ways.
The machine connection (power supply, command and encoder), mains and brake resistor come out from the top
part. The travelling cable and the shaft wiring come out from the bottom part.
5.1.3 Accessory for lfting the cabinet

As an option, an accessory for helping in the cabinet location can be coupled.
V101 - 03/2017 62/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.2 First and permanent electrical connections

5.2.1 Mains connection (power and lighting)
In the mains connection to the electrical controller, the power circuit shall be differentiated from the lighting
circuit. Before working in the controller, it is crucial to have a main switch capable of breaking the supply,
according to clause 5.10.5.1.2 of EN 81-20:2015 and standard 60204-1, clause 5.5. The mains connection
drawing shall be in accordance with the here below drawing:
N 1
13 1 3 5 N
B
Connect the auxiliary contact.
SMAIN FA If it does not exist, bypass
24E – 24S
13 1 3 5 N N 1 3 5 N 1
SMAIN
FF FA R S T N 24E 24S T' N'
L1 L2 L3
TCSM
FVEMC
BN
BU
4
4
L1 L2 L3 L4
14 2 4 6 N N 2 4 6 N 2
1 3 5 7 13 1 N
FSM1
FSM2
1 3 5 1 N 1 N
12 34 56 78 SMAIN FA
1 N 32A iID K 2P AC-type
2 4 6 8 14
T1 T2 T3 T4 230 V, 25A, 30mA
QF QAC QAH
FMA BN
2 N
BN
BN
BU
XALCAN:12
XALCAN:13
2,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
2 N
2 4 6 2 N 2 N
XALVF
VERY IMPORTANT: BEFORE CONNECTING THE DEVICE, ENSURE THAT THE

CABLE CONNECTED TO L3 OF SMAIN IS SAME PHASE OF THE ONE CONNECTED
TO FA. TO DO SO, A MULTIMETER CAN BE USED FOR CHECKING THAT THE
RESULT IS PRACTICALLY 0 VAC
V101 - 03/2017 63/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.2.2 Layout and mains power connection of the machine and brake resistor
The layout of the machine mains power connection depends on the type of cabinet assembly. There are 2 options:
1. Cabinet next to the shaft (left picture)

2. Cabinet not next to the shaft (right picture)
Whenever possible, the brake resistor will be located into the shaft. Therefore, an order is considered standard
when the distance between the cabinet and the shaft is not greater than 3 m. If it is greater, an additional cabinet
containing the brake resistor shall be located next to the electrical cabinet. Then, the order will be considered
special.
Brake resistor
It shall be located inside the shaft
The distance cabinet – shaft shall
Brake resistor
not exceed 3 m
Whenever possible, it is
recommended to place the
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN PLACING THE resistor in horizontal position to
RESISTOR, IT SHALL NEVER BE IN THE get a better heat evacuation
PROJECTION OF MOBILE ELEMENTS
Rear part of the cabinet

facing the shaft
V101 - 03/2017 64/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The connection to the block of contactors is independent from the installation type:
XSMUVW
Terminals for connecting the

machine mains power
XSMBT only valid for TEST mode

XSMMAQ1/2/3 XSMBT
13 1 3 5 N N 1 3 5 N 1
B
SMAIN FF FA
L1 L2 L3 TCSM
FVEMC
Mains power harness Machine
XSMMAQ1 WMAQ1/2 XMAQ BR1

VF+1 1 1 VF+1 GY VF+1 1
Brake coil 1
VF-1 2 2 VF-1 BK VF-1 2
XSMMAQ2 BR2
VF+2 1 1 VF+2 BU VF+2 3
Brake coil 2
VF-2 2 2 VF-2 BN VF-2 4
Rail for
connecting XSMMAQ3 TM
WMAQ3
the block of TM1 1 1 TM1 BN TM1 5 + -
contactors
Thermal probe
TM2 2 2 TM2 GN TM2 6
MF1 3 3 MF1 MF1 7 11

MF112
WH
Brake micro switch 1
MF2 4 4 MF2 MF2 8 11

MF212
GY
Brake micro switch 2
24V 5 5 24V YW 24V 9
XPWFR
The type of connector used
XPWK
guarantees the connection of shield
XDRMCB
and earth XPWFR
XENC
XPWFT XPWUVW XPWDC
WFR
1 BN
XPWFR 3 BU
GNYE
V101 - 03/2017 65/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.3 Temporary electrical connections for assembling

5.3.1 Connecting the assembly remote control
When the mechanical part is almost complete, the assembly remote control will be used to perform the installation
of the electrical part.
The assembly remote control is provided up, down and stop controls.
THERE IS NO NEED FOR PERFORMING EXTERNAL BRIDGES ON CONNECTORS OF THE SAFETY CHAIN
CMM
H07RN-F
50 m
9x1
450V/750V
1 7 40B 3
XPM5
11 EAH635KBL09
STOP
12
STOP
13 13
SUB BAJ
14 14
A
41B 6
SUB
1 8
1 6 MMS 2
XPM5
1 5 MMB 1
BAJ
13 13
SUB BAJ
XPM5 14 14
LINK
1 3 24M 8
Disconnect the connector existing in XPM5 and connect instead the

XPM5 of the assembly remote control
5.3.2 Connecting the overspeed governor and the tension pulley

Before performing the electrical installation, in addition to the assembly remote control, the overspeed governor
shall be operational. Therefore, the contact of the pulley for tensioning the overspeed governor cable shall be
connected.
XSMIH03 WPT
XSMCM01
H07RN-F
2x1
XSMIH01 450V/750V
14 10H 1 BU
XSMIH01 1320H
STLF
1 BN
EAM5CGR14
1230H 1 BN
9 50H
7 60H 0,75 WH
6 70H 0,75 WH
5 80H 0,75 WH
Governor tension pulley in the pit

8 90C
XSMCM01 9 80C 0,75 WH
EAM5CGR15
1050C
1141C 0,75 WH
1240C
1330C 0,75 WH
1 24MC
XSMIH03 2 INS
0,75 WH
EAM5CGR04
V101 - 03/2017 66/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4 Final electrical connections

Hereafter, all the connections which shall be the final ones for the installation to operate in normal mode are
developed
5.4.1 Shaft pre-wiring

The shaft pre-wiring is the part running through the lift shaft that remains static, connecting the controller to the
different safety elements, the lighting and the landing controls.
5.4.1.1 Point “A”, reference point of the shaft pre-wiring

The point “A” is marked on the shaft pre-wiring and it is the point reference for all the distances at which all the
other connectors are placed.
The physical reference in the shaft where this point shall be fixed is the intersection between the top level floor
and the corner where the trunking will run through.
Electrical cabinet next to the

Machine shaft
Landing door
5.4.1.2 Layout and assembly of trunkings

To assemble the trunkings, the following information shall be taken into account:
There are several sizes, the one represented on the complete lift layout is 80x60 (width x height, in mm), even
though the standard is 40x40, by default.
These layouts show the different possibilities according to the installation features:
 Case 1: Doors with an overhang greater than 20 mm: the pre-wiring can be driven under the landing door
sill to reach the point A.
 Case 2: Doors with an overhang greater than 20 mm and the shaft wiring for landing elements is driven
through a landing different from the one where the cabinet is located, as there more doors is this side than
in the side where the cabinet is fixed.
 Case 3: Doors with an overhang lower than 20 mm: the door next to the cabinet shall be surrounded by
the top part to reach the point A. If in addition the trunking is placed in a different landing, its run would be
the same of case 2 from the door sill.
Only the shaft pre-wiring is driven through the trunkings, not the travelling cable.
A A
A
1 2 3
V101 - 03/2017 67/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.3 Layout and fixing of the shaft pre-wiring

After the layout and the assembly of the trunkings, the point “A” of the shaft pre-wiring shall be fixed on the point
“A” of trunking determined on the previous stage.
Then, one part of the shaft pre-wiring shall be driven to the controller and the opposite part shall be driven to all
the other connections of the installation.
The following figures show the different configurations and layouts.
A A
A
1 2 3
5.4.1.4 Layout and assembly of lights

The layout drawings of the complete lift show the position of the vertical wiring for shaft lighting. This position is
designed to with the standard in term of luxes.
Bear in mind that the lamps are physically connected in series and only the first lamp shall be connected to the
shaft pre-wiring. The connector is located on the first connector branch next to the controller end (XRB).
V101 - 03/2017 68/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.5 Placing the top and bottom fixed cams

As the limit switch device is located on the car, two fixed cams shall be placed in the shaft, one on the bottom part
and the other one at the top. As the position of the final limit switch is not adjustable, the position adjustment of
these cams shall be carried at the completion of the final limit switch assembly, taking into account the distance
with regard to the level and to the buffers of car and counterweight. Before starting, it is recommended to have a
look on the exact laying scheme for the final limit switch which is provided with the order specific documentation.
5.4.1.6 Placing the magnets

There are two positioning elements located on the car (up on the same support of the final limit switch), so that
the magnets will be placed only on one of the guide rails and at both sides.
Special attention shall paid to the magnet polarity when placing it, bearing in mind that the north face of the
magnets marked with a line. The “north – south” combinations provide information about the car position when at
top or bottom or intermediate levels.
Magnet switches
N
S n
10
40
N
N
n-1
Guide rail
Magnet placed in
wrong position
N
N
1
S
40
S
0
10
Magnet placed in
right position
V101 - 03/2017 69/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.7 Connection and scheme of shaft lighting and socket

The shaft lighting circuit is split in two: on the one hand, the lighting circuit itself, composed of 3 changeover
switches (pit, controller and car roof) for the lamps and, on the other hand, the pit socket circuit. This separation
takes effect from the block of protections, where each circuit is provided with its relevant magnet thermal switch:
QAH for lighting, QTC for socket, from which the controller socket depends.
Connection to
controller
T2 XSMIH02
1 2 3 5 4 7 6
TCN
TCF
FH
NOA
NCA
NH
RBF
Shaft lighting
LMTE
BN RBF 1A WRB1
NH 2A
XRB1
BU 1 RBF 1
NH 2B
XRB1 2 NH 2
LH / /
BU
BN RBF 1B
WLMAQ LMAQ
BN RBF 1A
XLMAQ 1 RBF 1
BU NH 2A XLMAQ 2 NH 2
LMAQ LMAQ
1 Machine lighting
/17.5:5 2
BN NCA1
1 NCA BN
SALH
NOA 2
XCF1 XCF1
BN
FH 3 2 NOA BN
BN
3 FH BN
BN F 4
4 F
CF: pit box containing
N5 BN
BU
5 N BU
0 socket and changeover
TC
GNYE
switch for lighting
GNYE
1 PE
The pit box shall be placed within the measures shown in the following drawing (according to EN 81-20).
Pit box
< 0.75 m
>1m
>1m
Pit height
V101 - 03/2017 70/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.8 Connection and scheme for safety chain section of breakdowns

This is the section of the safety chain where the contacts of those devices actuating in the event of the lift
malfunctioning are located. This one is actually related to the static devices located in the shaft like: overspeed
governor, tension pulley of the governor and pit buffer.
According to EN 81-20 and EN 81-1 standards, this section of the safety chain shall consist of these contacts that
can be bridged by the emergency electrical operation, points 20H – 30H (overspeed governor and buffer) and
those that cannot, points 10H – 20H (tension pulley).
This section of the safety chain goes together with circuit for tripping and reset of the overspeed governor.
Connection to
controller
XSMIH01
12 13 14
30H
20H
10H
WLVH
GY 1 1 30H 1 30H1 11 12
2
XLVH XLVH 2 20H 20H 2
XE90 1
SLV
GY
3 220R
2
220R 3
2 Overspeed governor
3
3
4 0VR 4 0VR 4 SLVR
4
5 0VA 5 0VA 5
5
6 220A 6 220A 6 SLVA
6
7 PE GNYE PE 7
7
XLVCPH WLVHCP
GY 1 1 30H 1 30H1 11 12
XLVCPH XLVCPH XE90 1
SLVCP
GY 2 2 20H 2 20H 2
2 Counterweight overspeed governor
XE90
5 0VA 5 0VA 5
5
6 220A 6 220A 6 SLVCPA
6
7 PE GNYE PE 7
7
WTLH STLH
1 1 BU 11 12 Cable tension of the car’s overspeed governor
2
XTLH XTLH 2
STLH (when there is a governor on the car, MP GO!
GY BN
Flex XL)
WTLCPH STLCPH
1 1 BU 11 12 Cable tension of the counterweight’s overspeed
XTLCPH XTLCPH STLCPH
GY 2 2 BN governor (when there is a governor on the
counterweight)
WAFH SAFH
1
XAFH XAFH
1 BU
SAFH
11 12
Slackening of cables on headroom fixed point
20H 2 2 BN
GY
WTLF STLF
GY 10H1 1 BU 11 12
2
XTLF XTLF 2 BN
STLF Cable tension pulley of the overspeed governor
WTLCPF STLCPF
1
XTLCPF XTLCPF
1 BU
STLCPF
11 12
Cable tension pulley of the counterweight’s
GY 2 2 BN
overspeed governor
WAFF SAFF
GY 1 1 BU 11 12
GY 2
XAFF XAFF 2 BN
SAFF Slackening of cables on pit fixed point
WAM SAM
GY 1 1 BU 11 12
XAM XAFF SAM
GY 2 2 BN Pit buffer
XSMIH04 XSMIH05 XSMIH06

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
FM3
NM3
FM3
NM3
FM3
NM3
GY GY WLVH
1 30H 1 30H1 11 12
XLVH XE90 1
SLV
2 20H 2 20H 2
2
BN 3
XLVH
3 220R 3 220R 3
1 Reset of overspeed
BU 4 4 0VR 4 0VR 4 SLVR
5 5 0VA 0VA 5
2 governor contact
BU 5
BN 6 6 220A 6 220A 6
1
SLVA Remote tripping of the
2
7 7 PE GNYE PE 7 overspeed governor
1
1 30H WLVHCP 30H1 11 12

1
XLVHCP 2 20H 20H 2
XE90 1
SLVCP
2
2
XE90
BU 5 5 0VA 5 0VA 5
XLVCPH XLVHCP
BN 6 6 220A 6 220A 6
1
SLVCPA Remote tripping of the
2
7 7 PE GNYE PE 7 counterweight’s
1
overspeed governor
V101 - 03/2017 71/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.9 Connection and scheme for safety chain section maintenance

This is the section of the safety chain where the contacts of those devices actuating in the event of maintenance
and access, like: pit stop, changeover switch of inspection (if EN 81-20 compliant) and traps. This section is
located between the points 50H and 60H.
Connection to
controller
XSMIH03 XSMIH01
1 2 3 4 10 11 8 9
24MC
INS
SIS
SIB
41H
40H
51H
50H
STPH
XSTPH
BU 11 12
VT 50H1 1
XSTPH XSTPH Stop button next to
VT 2 2 BN
the machine
WTH STH
VT 1 1 BU 11 12
2
XTH XTH 2
STH
VT BN
Trap on the headroom
STPF
WSTPF
BU 11 12
VT 50H1 1
XSTPF XSTPF
VT 2 2 BN STOP in pit
WESCF SESCF
VT 50H1 1 BU 11 12
XESCF XESCF SESCF
VT 2 2 BN Pit ladder
CINS 7 8
VT 50H7 7 50H 1 SIB
41H 6
XMIF XMIF 6 41H
VT 2 7 8 3
VT 40H 5 5 40H 3 3 4 SIS
SIC
SIR 1 2
4 4 Inspection command
SIR
VT 51H 8 8 51H 5 12 11 (only for EN 81-20)
BAJ 4 4 BAJ 6 STOP 3 4
WH
SUB 3 3 SUB 7 4 3 SIB
WH
INS 2 2 INS 8 SIS 6 5
WH
24MC 1 1 24MC 9 SIR
RD
Stop next to the

machine
< 0.75 m
Stop button in the pit

Inspection
command next
> 0.4m
< 1m
to the safety
parallelepiped
<2m
< 1.2 m
1x0.7x0.5 m
V101 - 03/2017 72/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.10 Connection and scheme for safety chain section of doors

This is the section of the safety chain where the contacts of doors are located:
 For semi-automatic hinged landing doors, points 60H – 70H for the presence of landing doors; points
70H-80H for the lock of landing doors.
 For automatic landing doors, points 60H – 70H: bridge; points 70H-80H: lock of landing doors.
T2
XSMIH01
5 7 6
80H
60H
70H
WPCE(N)_(E)
GN 60H1 1 BN
80H 2
XPCE4 XPCE(N)_(E) 2
SPCE 1 11 11
GN BU Semi-automatic hinged
2
GN 3 3 BK SCEn SPCEn landing door at floor 4
4 4
3 12 12
GN GY
4
GNYE GNYE
1
WCE(N)_(E) SCEn
BN 80H1 11 12
1 BU
2
XCE3 XCE(N)_(E) SCE 1 Automatic landing door
BN 2 BN
GNYE
1 at floor 3
GNYE
1
1
WPCE(N)_(E)
1 BN
2
XPCE2 XPCE(N)_(E) SPCE 1
2 BU 11 11
GN 3 2 Semi-automatic hinged
3 BK SCEn SPCEn
GN 4 4
3 12 12 landing door at floor 2
GY
GNYE 4
GNYE
1
WCE(N)_(E) SCEn
1 1 BU 11 12
XCE1 XCE(N)_(E) SCE 1 Automatic landing door
BN 80H 2 2 BN
1 at floor 1
GNYE GNYE
1
V101 - 03/2017 73/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.11 Connection and scheme for communications (shaft CAN)

The safety chain section of communications, called CAN de HUECO, connects the controller to the LOB boards
which are the required interface between the controller and the LOPs or the landing indicators. It also connects the
controller to the landing displays, whenever they can be directly connected to the SHAFT CAN. Electrically, there
are two types of connection:
- Branch (4 poles): for devices located next to the shaft pre-wiring and the LOB boards, as a standard they
are very next to the trunkings.
- In T (6 poles): for devices whose location is distant from the shaft pre-wiring and the LOB boards are far
from the trunkings and the displays.
In the following drawing, the different types of connections to shaft pre-wiring are distinguished: the one
corresponding to the displays and LOB boards (with 6-pole and 4-pole connectors respectively), the other one is
the connection of LOPs to LOB board.
The complete lift layouts show how to place the LOB board. The way to associate the LOPs to each LOB board is
identified with each LOP in the following way:
XCAN64
XCAN63
XCAN62
4 4
LOB
XLBB4
3
2 XLBB3
1 3 XCAN42
XCAN
2 XLBB2
XLBB1
XCAN61
V101 - 03/2017 74/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

This electrical scheme details how the circuits are, whether the connection is made to a LOB board close to or
distant from the trunking (6-pole and 4-pole connectors respectively), or if it is a display:
LOB board XLBC1 XLBL1 XLBB1
XSMIH01 24MH E13 S13 S14 S15 0V 24M E1 E2 E3 S1 S2 S3 0V

XLBC2 XLBL2 XLBB2
1 2 3 4
24MH E14 S16 S17 S18 0V 24M E4 E5 E6 S4 S5 S6 0V
24MH
CMH
CML
0V
0V S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 24MH
XLBD12
24M CHH CHL 0V

XLBCAN
XLBD34
LOB 1B
0V S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 S7 24MH

E15 24MH 0V S21 S20 S19 0V S9 S8 S7 E9 E8 E7 24MH
XLBC3 XLBL3 XLBB3

XLBC4 XLBL4 XLBB4
Connection to a LOB
BK 0V 1A WCAN6 board distant from the
CML 2A
XCAN62 trunking
OG 1 0V BN
24M CHH CHL 0V

CMH 3A
XCAN6(N)_(E) 2 CML 0V 1
PK YE
24MH 4A 6 CML CML 2
XLBCAN_1 XLBCAN
RD GY
RD 24MH 4B 3 CMH GN CMH 3
PK CMH 5A 5 CMH BU 24MC 4
OG CML 6A 4 24MH RD
BK 0V 1B
Connection to a LOB
BK 0V 1A board next to the
CML 2A
XCAN42 trunking
OG WCAN4(N)
24M CHH CHL 0V

PK CMH 3A 1 0V BK 0V 1
XCAN4(N)_(E) XLBCAN_2
RD 24MH 4A 2 CML BN CML 2 XLBCAN
RD 24MH 4B 3 CMH BU CMH 3
PK CMH 3B 4 24MC GY 24MC 4
OG CML 2B
BK 0V 1B
WDIS2_1 Connection to a display

BK 0V 1A 1 24MH RD
CML 2A
XCAN61 XCAN61
OG 2 CMH YE POWER SUPPLY +
PK CMH 3A 5 CMH GY CAN_H
RD 24MH4A 3 CML BN CAN_L
x2 x1 PK CMH 5A 6 CML BU POWER SUPPLY -
120 OHM 1/2 W OG CML 6A 4 0V GN
V101 - 03/2017 75/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.1.12 Connection and scheme for LOPs and landing indicators

The pushbuttons and light indicators (not displays) are always connected to the LOB boards. The distribution of
the LOB boards is normally organised in groups of 4 LOPs. Only when the LOPs are very complex, the distribution
will be made in groups of 2 LOPs. The usual configuration supports following elements:
 2 pushbuttons with light and sound indicators.
 1 additional pushbutton or key switch.
 Direction indicators (arrows).
 1 additional light indicator.
The LOB boards are provided with 4 sets of connectors, made each one of 3 connectors in such a way that
complete LOP is connected to each set (visually, the names of the internal connections are from top to bottom,
even though the LOPs are physically located from bottom to top):
 XLBB_ (8 poles): call pushbuttons
 XLBL_ (4 poles): indicators
 XLBC_ (2 poles): additional contact
The complete lift layouts show how to place the LOB board.
LOB boards are identified as LOB_1, 2, 3… from bottom to top, in groups of 4 simple LOPs.
The identification of the LOPs for their correspondence with each LOB board is shown in each harness of each LOP.
As an example:
 WLBB1_2: it would correspond to harness of LOP buttons, connection to XLBB1 of LOB 2
 WLBB4_3: it would correspond to harness of LOP buttons, connection to XLBB4 of LOB 3
 WLLB3_5: it would correspond to harness of LOP buttons, connection to XLBL3 of LOB 5
Connection to sets
XLBB_1…4 with
Interconnection harness
pushbuttons
LOB 1 with LOP of floor 1
XLBC1 XLBL1 XLBB1 WLBB1_1
1 0V BK 6 0V
XLBB1_1 2 S3 8 Z x2 x1
BN
4 S1 YE 5 S1 x1 x2 x2 x1
S13 S14 S15 0V 7 E1 4 E1 x1 x2

24MH E13 24M E1 E2 E3 S1 S2 S3 0V PK
XLBC2 XLBL2 XLBB2

8 24MH RD 3 24V 14 13
5 E3 BU 7 E3
E3
6 E2 GY 1 E2
E2
3 S2 GN 2 S2
S2
24MH E14 S16 S17 S18 0V 24M E4 E5 E6 S4 S5 S6 0V

0V S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 24MH
Interconnection harness
LOB 1 with LOP of floor 2
WLBB2_1
1 0V BK 6 0V
XLBB2_1 2 S3 8 Z x2 x1
BN
4 S1 YE 5 S1 x1 x2 x2 x1
7 E1 PK 4 E1 x1 x2
8 24MH RD 3 24V 14 13
5 E3 BU 7 E3
E3
6 E2 GY 1 E2
E2
3 S2 GN 2 S2
S2
XLBD12
24M CHH CHL 0V
XLBCAN Interconnection harness

XLBD34 LOB 1 with LOP of floor 3
LOB 1
0V S12 S11 S10 S9 S8 S7 24MH
WLBB3_1
1 0V BK 6 0V
XLBB3_1 2 S3 8 Z x2 x1
BN
4 S1 YE 5 S1 x1 x2 x2 x1
7 E1 PK 4 E1 x1 x2
8 24MH RD 3 24V 14 13
5 E3 BU 7 E3
E3
6 E2 GY 1 E2
E2
3 S2 GN 2 S2
S2
Interconnection harness Internal circuit for landing

E15 24MH 0V S21 S20 S19 0V S9 S8 S7 E9 E8 E7 24MH LOB 1 with LOP of floor 4 IMPULSE button
WLBB4_1
1 0V BK 6 0V
XLBB4_1
XLBC3 XLBL3 XLBB3 2 S3 BN 8 Z x2 x1
4 S1 YE 5 S1 x1 x2 x2 x1
7 E1 PK 4 E1 x1 x2
8 24MH RD 3 24V 14 13
5 E3 BU 7 E3
E3
6 E2 GY 1 E2
E2
XLBC4 XLBL4 XLBB4 3 S2 GN 2 S2
S2
V101 - 03/2017 76/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Example of three types of LOP showing that the external connection is always driven to the main
pushbutton. The secondary pushbuttons (centre and right figures) are connected to the main pushbutton.
Connection to sets XLBB_1…4
5.4.2 Installation of the travelling cable

The travelling cable is the part of the electrical re-wiring connecting the controller to the car. This is the reason
why, there is a static part of the travelling cable, fixed to the controller and to the top and middle part of the shaft
and there is a free and dynamic part hanging from the car. All these issues shall be taken into account to fix it in
the appropriate way.
V101 - 03/2017 77/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.2.1 Layout and fixing the travelling cable

For the proper layout of the travelling cable, some variables shall be taken into account. As the number of possible
layouts is very high, the figures show only the most representative. The recommended layout is included into the
specific documentation of the order which is sent with the electrical pre-wiring.
Case 1: Cabinet at the top floor, next to the shaft sand sill overhang less than 20 mm
Case 2: Cabinet at the top floor, next to the shaft sand sill overhang greater than 20 mm
The two main fixings of the travelling cable to the shaft wall are:
The first one on the wall coinciding with the car side where the omega profile for protecting the COP is located
and the second one at half run height.
The following fixings will be performed by the side of the protection omega profile up to the car roof, where the
box of connections CCT is located.
Travelling cable
Support
base
Wedge
V101 - 03/2017 78/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.2.2 Connection and scheme for the travelling cable

There will only be a travelling cable connecting the controller to the REV board, located inside the box of
connections on the roof. The circuits of the travelling cable are the following ones:
 Communications XRVCAM – XSMCM01 XSMCM01 XSMCM02

o Controller CAN
o Auxiliary CAN
 Safety chain XRVSS – XSMCM01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 PE
o Breakdown
CAL
NM2
NC
0V
FM2
CML
24MC
CMH
24A
CAH
90C
80C
50C
41C
40C
30C
FC
o Maintenance
o Car door
 Lighting and sockets XRVTC – XSMCM01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 GNYE
 Operator power supply XRVTC – XSMCM02
 Earth GNYE
1 24MC
XRVCAM 2 CMH
3 CML
4 24A
XSMCM1 XSMCM2 5 CAL
6 CAH
7 0V
1 90R
XRVSS 2 80R
3 50R
4 41R
XSMCM1 XSMCM2
5 40R
6 30R
XRVTC XRVSS XRVCAM
1 NM2
XRVTC 2 FM2
3 FC
4 NC
PE
CUMA
24X0,75
XRVCAM
XRVSS
XRVTC
V101 - 03/2017 79/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.3 Box of connections on the car roof (CCT)

The CCT is the central element of the car from where depart and arrive all the connections of the different car
devices. This box will be placed on the car roof, preferably in vertical position.
5.4.3.1 Presentation of the CCT

The CCT contains the REV board which is provided with sets of connections according to the circuit type:
REV board
Connections of the Connections of the
Travelling cable Travelling cable
Connections of the COP
Console connection
Connections of Connections of
safety chain the 24 VDC-
control elements
Connections of
220 VAC-
operator supply
Connections of
car lighting
Connection of the
inspection command
V101 - 03/2017 80/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.3.2 Fixing type of the CCT box on the roof

Depending on the characteristics of the installation, the type of fixing on the car roof will be determined:
KIT 1: vertical fixing on balustrade
V101 - 03/2017 81/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 KIT 2: vertical fixing on the car roof
V101 - 03/2017 82/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 KIT 3: horizontal fixing on the car roof (only for reduced headroom)
5.4.3.3 Connection and fixing of the travelling cable to the CCT

After the CCT is fixed, the travelling cable will be routed by the car side going up to the CCT and fix it to the rear
part, as shown in the figure. The connections are located on the top part of the REV board.
To get all the cables duly hidden, the protective cover will be placed after the travelling cable has been fixed and
connected.
V101 - 03/2017 83/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.3.4 Connection and scheme for the command elements and signage of the CCT
The following elements are located in the fixed part of the CCT:
 Socket “TC”. It is provided with a 6 A-magneto thermal switch, in such a way its use is limited to
approximately 1200 W.
Alarm pushbutton “SARI”
 Loudspeaker “ALT”
 Emergency lighting (only for EN 81-20/50) “PLF”
SPHH SARI ALT PLF
TC
ALT
4 ALT+ WH
XRVEA
3 ALT- WH SARI
8 24A WH 1 2
7 SARI SPHH
WH
XRVEA 6 PHH WH 3 4
XRVTE 2 24AUX WH
PLF
1 0V WH x1 x2
5 PLFT WH
TC
1 FC WH
XRVTE 2 NC WH
PE GNYE
 Lighting shaft switch “SPHH”. The operation mode is the following one:
It enables you to switch the shaft lighting by means of a relay located on the ALIM board, inside the
machine room controller. The switching time restricted to 10 s. It means that, when actuating SPHH, the
next light switching shall wait for, at least, 10 s. I. e, during 10 s from the first switching, the circuit is
disabled and, after these 10 s, it is enabled for next change of SPHH state. The following diagram shows
the different possibilities.
SHAFT LIGHT OFF ON
SPHH STATE OFF ON OFF
V101 - 03/2017 84/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.3.5 Connection and scheme for inspection command

This command contains the controls to move the car in inspection mode. It is provided with following elements:
 Changeover switch for inspection: SIR
 Up pushbutton: SIS
 Down pushbutton: SIB
 Run pushbutton: SIC
 Stop mushroom: STOP
The connection will be performed to the XRVMR connector of REV board.
STOP
SIR
SIC
SIS
SIB
96
43I 97 XRVMR
CINS 7 8
1144I 1 SIB
XRVMR
10 44I 2 7 8
44I 98 SIS
3
13 43I 3 3 4
SIR SIC
42I 99 7 42I 4 1 2 4 /18.7
SIR
45I BAJ 4 45T 5 12 11
STOP
SUB 6 BAJ 6 3 4
SIB
3 SUB 7 4 3
24MC SIS
INS 2 INS 8 6 5
SIR
1 24MC 9
The operation mode is the following one:

Switch SIR to Inspection position
Press SIC.
Its idle position is on a support that shall be fixed on the CCT

cover, as shown on this figure.
WARNING: MP ecoGO controller monitors the status of the

inspection command contacts; therefore, it requires a certain
activation sequence of the pushbuttons. First, the run
pushbutton shall be actioned and, after, the direction motion
wanted. Otherwise, the lift will not carry out any motion.
V101 - 03/2017 85/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.3.6 Connection and scheme for elements associated to the car lighting circuit
The elements associated to the car lighting circuit are:
 Socket (already treated at paragraph about fixed elements of the CCT): XRVTE
 Interior lighting of the car: XRVHC
 Car roof lighting: XRVHTC
 Fan or extractor: XRVVT
 Auxiliary power supply (no specific function): XRV230T
WHC
1 HC BN L 1
XRVHC 2 NC N 3
BU
GNYE T 2
WHTC
1 FC BU
XRVHTC 2 NC BN
HC NC
NC
SRVHTC
VC
XRVHC XRVVT
NC
FC NC
FC NC
WVC
FC XRVVT
1 VC BN L 1
2 NC BU N 3
GNYE T 2
XRV230T XRVHTC XRVTE
5.4.3.7 Connection, scheme and fixing of positioners

For a proper fixing of the positioners, some variables shall be taken into account. As the number of possible
assemblies is almost high, the figure shows the most representative corresponding to MP GO! Evolution. The types
of guide rails, car frame and flange affect the fixing, so that the exact assembly to be carried out will show in the
specific documentation sent with the electrical pre-wiring.
There are two positioners assembled up on the same support and placed at both sides of the guide rail. Their
identification is:
 POSR, for the right side of the guide rail: XRVIR where the safety area magnets are read
 POSL, for the left side of the guide rail: XRVIL where the level area magnets are read
The figure also shows the placement of the final limit switch which is located on the same support, even though
the electrical connection is performed at another location inside the REV (XRVFIN) board.
According to the configuration, the final limit switch will be placed at the right side or at the left side of the guide
rail. The picture shows a left side placement.
X ≤ 20 mm
X
V101 - 03/2017 86/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

NA
NM
NMIS XRVIL
0V
24P
ZSA
ZSM
ZSMES XRVIR
0V
24P
XPOSL XPOSR
WIL
1 24P 0,25 RD 24P 1
XRVIL 2 0V 0V 2
XPOSL
0,25 BK
3 NMIS 0,25 BU NMIS 3

4 NM 0,25 GY NM 4
5 NA 0,25 BN NA 5
WIR
1 24P 0,25 RD 24P 1
XRVIR 2 0V 0V 2
XPOSR
0,25 BK
3 ZSMES 0,25 BU ZSMES 3

4 ZSM 0,25 GY ZSM 4
5 ZSA 0,25 BN ZSA 5
5.4.3.8 Connection, scheme and fixing of the alarm pushbutton under the car floor
This element has a double function. On the one hand, it is provided with a button generating a sound alarm that
activates the emergency system and, on the other hand, it contains a light indicator which is activated in a
flashing way when the lift moves in doors series bypass mode (bypass mode). The latter function is associated to
the EN 81-20/50, but it is also supplied for EN 81-1/2.
XRVDOC2
24A
XRVARFL
CAH
0V CAL
LSARF 0V
SARF CAH
24V CAL
XRVESM
VESM
ESM1
ESM2
ESM3
SAFRL
WARFL
1 24A BU 12 11
XRVARFL 2 SARF BN
SAFRL 4 0V BK
3 XLSARF GY
V101 - 03/2017 87/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.3.9 Connection and scheme for contact of car door full open
This contact is associated to the compliance with EN 81-28 and shall be provided to all the car door operators
complying with this standard. The contact shall be closed when the door is full open.
CAH
CAL
XRVESM
VESM
ESM1
SARP1 XRVARP1
ESM2
ESM3
24A
ESM4 SARP2
0V 24A XRVARP2
XRVIPS NA
FS NM
0V NMIS XRVIL
0V
WARP1 SARP1
1 24A BK 11 12
XRVARP1 2 SARP1
U1:1
BU
U2:1
5.4.3.10 Connection and scheme for elements of the safety chain

The elements associated to the safety chain are:
 Breakdown series:
o Final limit switch XRVFIN
o Safety gear: XRVAC
 Maintenance series:
o Additional stop: XRVSTP
o Interlocking of car 1: XRVEC1
o Interlocking of car 2: XRVEC2
o Folding balustrade: XRVBR
 Door series:
o Car door of main access: XRVPC1
o Car door of secondary access: XRVPC2
WAC SAC
1 31T BN 11 12
XRVAC 2 30T BU
WEC1 SEC1
1 45T BN 11 12
XRVEC1 2 46T BU
WEC2 SEC2
1 47T BN 11 12
XRVEC2 2 46T BU
WPC1 SPC1
1 81T BN 11 12
XRVPC1 2 80T BU
40I 41I 42I 43I
90T
WPC2 SPC2
30T
1 81T BN 11 12
81T XRVPC2 2 90T BU
XRVPC2 XRVBR
31T
80T
WTPB STPB
XRVAC XRVTPB
1 47T BN 11 12
81T 2 50T BU
46T
XRVPC1
40T
47T
WFIN SFIN
1 31T BN 11 12
XRVEC2 31T
XRVFIN 2 40T BU
XRVFIN
46T
50T
1 40I BK 14 13
XRVBR 2 41I
45T GY
47T 3 42I BN 12 11
XRVEC1 XRVTPB 4 43I BU
V101 - 03/2017 88/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.4 Control box for door operatoor (DOC)

5.4.4.1 Presentation of the DOC box
This box contains the DOC board which is the interface required between the controller and any type of car door
operator. The circuits associated to every access go through this board, except for the car door series in the safety
chain (XRVPC1 and 2 of points 80C-90C) and the contact of door full open (XRVARP1 and 2).
It manages:
 Power supply: XOPOP
 Control of opening and closing via voltage-free contacts: XOPC1 XOPF1 XOPF2
XOPCAN
 Contact of re-opening or sensitivity: XOPSN
 Final limit switches for closing and opening of doors (if required):
XOPEA
 Contact of door closed (only for EN 81-20/50): XOPEA
 Photocell (curtain): XOPF1, XOPF2 XOPEA
 Jamb arrows: XOPFJ
 Bench of micro switches (1, 2, 3… 8) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
XOPSN
5.4.4.2 Connection and scheme to REV board

XOPFJ
The DOC board is connected to the REV board via two circuits:
 230 VAC-power supply: XRVOP1
 Controller CAN communication: XRVDOC
XOPOP
XRVDOC1
XOPC1
24MC
NM2 NM2 NML CMH
FOP FOP FML CML

0V
XRVOP1 XRVOP2 XRVLV
CMH
CML
WOP1
GNYE T 1
XOPOP
2 NM2 BN NM3 2
XRVOP1 1 FOP 7 mm
FM3 3
BU
WDOC
1 CML GY CML 1
XRVDOC1 XOPCAN
2 CMH BU CMH 2
3 0V BK 0V5mm
3
4 CML YE CML 4
5 CMH WH CMH 5
6 24MC BN 24MC 6
XOPCAN
XOPCAN
XOPOP
XOPOP
V101 - 03/2017 89/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.4.3 Connection and scheme for the photocell and jamb arrows
WOPF1
1 IN YE
XOPF1 2 0V
FT1
BK
FT1
3 24M RD
FT1
WOPF2 FT2
XOPF1 XOPF2 2 0V BK
XOPCAN XOPF2 3 24M
FT2
RD
FT2
XOPEA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
XOPSN
WFJ
1 FB GY 1
XOPFJ XOPFJ XFJ
2 0V BN 2
3 FS BK 3 XFJ
XOPOP
XOPC1
5.4.4.4 Connection and scheme for REVECO operator control

The connection of REVECO II or REVECO-GO! operators is performed from the DOC board.
The connections from the REV board to the operator are also shown, i.e. the safety chain and the contact of door
full open.
P12
XOPC1 connector:
 T: earth conductor
1 OB2
2 OBX
3 V1
4 V2
5 -
6 C1
7 C2
8 C3
9 C4
XOPF1 XOPF2  NM3: Neutral for power supply of the operator board and
XOPCAN
output reference door open and close signals
 FM3: Phase for operator board power supply
WP122 WP121
 A2: Open signal. Voltage reference NM3
 AB1: Common for open and close signals (NM3)
BU
BK
BN
BU
GNYE
GY
BK
 B2: Close signal. NM3 voltage reference

XOPEA XOPSN connector:
 24M: 24VDC as reference for the re-opening signal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
 E1: Input for the re-opening signal (NC). When there is
no voltage, the controller understands that the closing
24M 24M
XOPSN
XOPSN
2
E1 E1
shall be interrupted.
1
P12 connector:
XOPFJ  OB2 – OBX: re-opening circuit
 V1: Phase of REVECO board power supply (FM3) and
reference for input of open and close signals.
 V2: Neutral of REVECO board power supply (NM3)
XOPOP
 C1: Close signal (NM3)
 C2: Voltage reference for close signal (FM3)
 C3: Open signal (NM3)
 C4: Voltage reference for open signal (FM3)
XOPC1
T NM3 FM3 A2 AB1 B2
T
XOPC1
1
NM3
2
FM3
3
A2
4
1 BK
AB1
5
B2
6
V101 - 03/2017 90/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.4.5 Connection and scheme for non-MP operator control

For controlling a non-MP control, bear in mind how the DOC board works.
The example shows the connection of an operator, type 3VF, with 230 VAC-signals to open and close.
The XOPC1 connector contains the AB1 terminal which will be the reference voltage to be used for the open and
close signals coming out through A2 and B2 respectively.
FM3, NM3 is the power supply, entered via FM3, NM3 of XOPOP connector, then coming out to the operator.
XOPC1 connector:
1 E1
2 24M
3 FM3
4 NM3
5 -
6 C
7 A
XOPF1 XOPF2  T: earth conductor

XOPCAN  NM3: Neutral for power supply of the operator board and
output reference door open and close signals
WP122 WP121  FM3: Phase for operator board power supply
 A2: Open signal. Voltage reference NM3
BU
BK
BN
BU
GNYE
GY
BK
 AB1: Common for open and close signals (NM3)

XOPEA  B2: Close signal. NM3 voltage reference
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
XOPSN connector:
24M 24M
 24M: 24VDC as reference for the re-opening signal
XOPSN
XOPSN
 E1: Input for the re-opening signal (NC). When there is
2
E1 E1
1
no voltage, the controller understands that the closing

shall be interrupted.
XOPFJ
End connected to the operator:
 E1 – 24M: re-opening circuit
 V1: Phase of REVECO board power supply (FM3) and
reference for input of open and close signals
 V2: Neutral of REVECO board power supply (NM3)
XOPOP
 C1: Close signal (NM3)
 C2: Voltage reference for close signal (FM3)
 C3: Open signal (NM3)
XOPC1
 C4: Voltage reference for open signal (FM3)
T NM3 FM3 A2 AB1 B2
T
XOPC1
1
NM3
2
FM3
3
A2
4
1 BK
AB1
5
B2
6
V101 - 03/2017 91/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.5 COP
The controls and indicators for the normal operation of the lift are located on the COP.
Normally, the COP consists of the following elements:
 CAR board: composed of a LCD or TFT and emergency light
 Fonomac 3: in the event of analogue telephone
 TEL board: in the event of GSM telephone or audio pack 22
 Call pushbuttons: a maximum of 12 pushbuttons or key switches 23
 Pushbuttons for control: a maximum of 6 pushbuttons or key switches
The wiring of both pushbuttons will be performed, separately and via a harness between the CAR board and every
pushbutton.
5.4.5.1 COP fixing24
FUSION COP fixing
22
Gong and voice synthesizer. It is an indivisible package.
23
For more than 12 stops, the numeric keypad is required.
24
It shows a FUSION COP, for MP CARevolution cars.
V101 - 03/2017 92/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.5.2 Scheme for connection between COP and car roof

The elements to be connected between the COP and REV board are the following ones:
 REV board - CAR board: controller CAN, XRVCMC – XDCCAN.
 REV board - TEL board: auxiliary CAN, XRVCAC – XTLCAN.
 REV board – Fonomac 3: auxiliary CAN, XRVCAC – XCAN whenever there is no TEL board. Otherwise, the
wiring is made inside the COP.
REV board on
car roof
WCAC5
1 CAL BN CAL 1
XRVCAC XTLCAC
2 CAH BU CAH 2
3 0V BK 5 mm
0V 3
4 CAL WH CAL 4
5 CAH GY CAH 5
6 24A YE 24V 6
WCMC
1 CML BN 1
XRVCMC XDCCMC
2 CMH BU 2
3 0V 5mm
3
GY
4 CML BK 4
5 CMH WH 5
6 24MC YE 6
XRVTF XRVESA
XRVCAC XRVCMC Connections to REV
board inside the box
TF2 TF1 of connections on the
ESA1
ESA3
ESA2
ESA4
ALNO
ALNC
AL
24A
24MC
0V
24A
CAH
CAH
CAL
CAL
CMH
CMH
XRVLT1 CML car roof
CML
0V
COP 0V
Connections to CAR
XDCCMC XDCPLF board on the COP
Connections to TEL
XTLCAC board on the COP
V101 - 03/2017 93/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

5.4.5.3 Scheme for internal connection of the COP

The elements to be interconnected on the COP are the following ones:
 CAR board and call pushbuttons:
 XDC01 – pushbutton1 (bottom floor)
 XDC02 – pushbutton2
 XDC03 – pushbutton3
XDC07 XDC08 XDC09 XDC10 XDC11 XDC12
XDC01 XDC02 XDC03 XDC04 XDC05 XDC06
14 13
1 24V
1 24V RD 24V 1
XDC1 XP0 2 E1
x2 x1
2 E1 PK E1 2
3 S1 S1 3 3 S1
YE
4 0V 0V 4 4 0V
BK
x2 x1
14 13
XP XDC2
1 24V
2 E2
RD
PK
24V 1
E2 2
XP1
1 24V
2 E2
x2 x1
3 S2 S2 3 3 S2
YE
4 0V 0V 4 4 0V
BK
x2 x1
XPCP XPAP XPAL
XDCAUX XDCAUX XDCAUX
V101 - 03/2017 94/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Whatever is the configuration, there is no column order.
CAR board and control pushbuttons:

XDCAL – alarm pushbutton
XDCAP – open door pushbutton
XDCCP – close door pushbutton
XDCA1 – pushbutton or auxiliary key switch 1
XDCA2 – pushbutton or auxiliary key switch 2
XDCA1 XDCA2 XDCA4
XDCAP XDCCP XDCA3 XDCAL
14 13
1 24V
1 24V BN 24V 1
XDCAP XPAP 2 AP
x2 x1
2 AP GN AP 2
3 LAP LAP 3 3 LAP
GY
4 0V 0V 4 4 0V
BU
x2 x1
14 13
XP XDCCP
1 24V
2 CP
BN
GN
24V 1
CP 2
XPCP
1 24V
2 CP
x2 x1
3 LCP GY LCP 3 3 LCP

4 0V BU 0V 4 4 0V
x2 x1
x2 x1
1 24V
1 24V BN 24V 1
XDCAL XPAL 2 PAL 12 11
2 PAL GN PAL 2
3 LPAL LPAL 3 3 LPAL
GY
4 0V 0V 4 4 0V x2 x1
BU
x2 x1 12 11
XPCP XPAP XPAL
XDCAUX XDCAUX XDCAUX
V101 - 03/2017 95/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

CAR board and TEL board: XDCPLF - XTLPLF
3
40.1:5
3
40.3:5
XDCCMC XDCPLF
3
40.4:3
3
40.1:3 XTLCAC XTLPLF
1 0V WH 0V 1
XTLPLF XDCPLF
2 PAL WH PAL 2
3 TFT WH TFT 3
4 LPAL WH LPAL 4
5 PLF WH PLF 5
6 24A WH 24A 6
V101 - 03/2017 96/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

6 TECHNICIAN INTERFACE
6.1 Introduction
MP ecoGO controller is provided with 3 levels of information:
 Basic/local: it is a local information that is always available, but it does not allow to carry out any setting.
The basic/local information is provided via LEDs and sound elements of the electronical boards the
controller is made of. Its function is to supply to the technician general information about the operation
mode and the status of the controller, status of communications, of power supplies and safety chain. It is
located on every board and its behaviour can be set via parameterisation.
 Advanced/local: it is a local interactive information allowing to visualise complex information (graphics,

tables, pictures, etc.), but also to manipulate/alter the controller setting.
 Advanced/Remote: it is a remote information aimed at maintenance, even if it allows a certain

interactivity (setting and firmware update). It is not located in the controller and it allows the handling
great volumes of information.
The basic level elements are part of the controller and they are always available. However, the advanced level
elements require a series of external tools which are not integrated in the installation, but they can be ordered
separately. The external tools available are the following ones:
 MP ecoGO console: MP ecoGO console is a local tool which is to be connected to the controller by means
of a CAN-BUS interface on three specific connectors of DB9 type. MP ecoGO console is aimed at making
easier the jobs of lift assembly, commissioning and maintenance. This tool is not part of the controller
and it shall be separately ordered.
 GUIA module: it is equivalent to the MP ecoGO console, but it is integrated into the controller, more
precisely into the command panel. It is oriented toward those installations requiring, in a permanent way,
an element for maintenance operations. Like the console, it allows the jobs for assembling,
commissioning and maintaining the lift. The GUIA module is an option and shall be marked as such when
making the purchase order.
 MP ecoGOTools and HEA INTERCOM: MP ecoGOTools is a PC application, with architecture x86_x64,

requiring Windows 7 or higher OS. MP ecoGOTools shares with the MP ecoGO console the same
connection interface. Therefore, an interface box is required, HEA INTERCOM, for connecting the PC (USB
connector) with the controller (CAN-BUS, DB9 connector). The PC application is provided with the same
functions as the console, generally more advanced, and some specific ones, like the configurator for TFT-
070E display, the download of firmware and error analysis. This tool is not part of the controller and it
shall be separately ordered.
 sigma4lifts (Advanced/Remote): the MP ecoGO controller gives the possibility to get connected to a
remote service, cloud-based, called sigma4lifts. This connection is permanent and allows the sharing of
information related to the maintenance (errors, alarms, notices, status, alarm management according to
EN 81-28), basic monitoring and apply batch settings. These batch settings affect a series of lifts; they
can be programmed and do not require the technician intervention. sigma4lifts is not designed for
assembling and commissioning jobs which are exclusively covered by local tools. sigma4lifts shall be
separately hired and requires MP’s digital telephony option (LINK board).
In addition, MP ecoGO controller is provided with:
 Simulating the console on TFT-070E car display: The TFT-070E car display gives the possibility to get de
some MP ecoGO console applications available. These applications and the way to access them are
described in the relevant chapters of the present manual.
 Command panel: MP ecoGO is provided with a command panel into the controller cabinet. The main
controller functions shall be executed through it, such as switching off and on, rescue, test, among other
ones. Each of them will be described in the hereafter sections of this chapter.
V101 - 03/2017 97/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

6.2 Points for handling

MP ecoGO controller is provided with safe areas for the handling of technical staff. The areas enabled for that
purpose are identified with green colour. For instance
Command panel Box of connections
On the other hand, the COP pushbuttons can be used, in addition to their natural function, to access certain
special operations. These operations are restricted by means of access codes and they can be split into 2 types:
 Technician operations: they are operations related to the lift maintenance. An example of this is to take
the car roof to floor level, to let the technician access the roof, or the activation of console mode on the
TFT-070E car display:
o Method: press at the same time the pushbuttons for opening doors and closing doors, while
introducing a code by using the floors pushbuttons.
o The above mentioned operations and access codes for the activation will be described in other
manual sections.
 User operations: MP ecoGO controller gives the possibility to assign an access code either to the COP, or
to particular floors. These settings are executed through controller parameters. The access to the
restricted floors of the installation is carried out via code:
o Method: keep pressed the pushbuttons for closing doors while introducing a code by using the
floors pushbuttons.
o The access codes to every floor is set to the following parameters associated to each floor:
 Restricted floor: enables the access control to a floor. Select the value “Access available
from the COP”.
 Key for car calls: numeric value corresponding to the access key.
6.3 Information provided by other elements of the installation

6.3.1 Car displays
MP ecoGO controller gives the possibility to use two types of display in car: the LCD-070E display and the TFT-
070E display.
LCD-070E display: it is a classic LCD display with 7”-screen; the information appearing on the screen is static and
pre-defined. This information is described at chapter about electronic boards and it is the usual one.
TFT-070E display: it is a graphic display with 7”-screen. The information supplied is highly configurable and it can
be classified according to following items:
 Lift information: it is the information provided by the lift to the car user. In addition to the mandatory one
(car position, arrows, directory of floors, weight, etc.), there are also date and time, icons (logos, no
smoking symbol, etc.) and emerging information associated to some events (pushbutton for opening
doors, pushbutton for closing doors, alarm pushbutton).
 Technician information: these messages are recorded by the technician on the lift to inform the car user
about a certain event related to the maintenance; for instance, next maintenance inspections or the
cause of the current failure and a date for resolving it.
 Building owner information: these messages are, both graphics and texts, determined by the building
owner to inform about some events.
V101 - 03/2017 98/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

TFT-070E display is provided with a setting tool, very intuitive, allowing a great variety of setting motifs, both
static and dynamic. Dynamic motifs can be associated to floors and to timers as well.
In addition, icons associated to modes and statuses of MP ecoGO controller have been defined. These icons will be
the same, whatever the means used for visualising them (console, LCD-070E and TFT-070E displays).
6.3.2 Command panel

The command panel is an element required for maintenance jobs, test and rescue. The use is described at chapter
about maintenance of this manual.
The command panel is provided with a series of light indicators described here below:
 Level indicator: green circular light, located on the top part of the command panel and identified with the
word “LEVEL”. It is lit when the car is at floor level.
 Direction arrows: light pushbuttons of circular shape, in red, located upon two white triangles stating the
car motion direction during the lift travel. If both triangles are flashing, it means there is an error on the
ALIM board or the installation accelerometers are not calibrated.
 Alarm indicator: yellow circular light, located upon a screen-printed bell. It is lit via the activation of some
alarm pushbuttons in the installation.
6.4 Information provided by the electronic boards

The electronic boards are provided with a series of LEDs whose colour and status will depend from the information
they shall supply. The detailed information supplied by these LEDs is described in this manual, at chapter
Electronic boards and devices. The present section is only about the general behaviours of these elements.
Concerning the information supplied by the boards, it can classified in:
 LEDs of communications (except for the MCB board ones): all the electronic boards connected to a
communication BUS are provided with these LEDs. Their colour will depend from the BUS to which the
board is connected: blue if it is connected the auxiliary circuit BUS, green when it is connected to the
controller circuit BUS. All of them are informing about CAN-BUS connection status.
 LEDs of power supply and status: they inform whether the electronic board receives power supply and it
work properly or, otherwise, if there any kind of error on it. Their colour will depend from the BUS to
which the board is connected: blue if it is connected the auxiliary circuit BUS, green when it is connected
to the controller circuit BUS.
 Information LEDs: depending on their function, they may have different colours, except red and blue.
 LEDs of dangerous voltage (voltage higher than 50 VAC): they are red and inform about the presence of
dangerous voltages on the electronic board.
Some specific LEDs are:

 Main LED for auxiliary circuit status (DLPSF): it is located on the ALIM board and informs, via flashing
sequences, about the auxiliary circuit status.
 LED for the controller circuit status (DLMCF): it is located on the ALIM board and informs whether the
MCB board receives power supply or not.
 LED for general power supply (DLACF): it is located on the ALIM board and informs whether the controller
receives power supply from the mains or the emergency device (batteries).
 LED for controller mode (DLOK): it is located on the MCB board and informs about the controller
operation mode (normal, maintenance, special operations) or there is an error.
 LEDs for MCB board communication: MCB board is the central node of the controller communications. It is
provided with a series of communication LEDs (DLGT, DLC, DLH, DLB) informing about the connection of
specific elements (inverter, car, ALIM, MCB for groups of lifts).
In general, LEDs lit in a fixed way inform about a proper operation and LEDs flashing mean a transitional situation
or an error occurred. LEDs off are associated to a lack of power supply, whether it is due to an external or internal
(stand-by mode) cause.
V101 - 03/2017 99/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The LEDs are provided with the timed off option, via the relevant parameter, or always activated. The timing
affects all the LEDs except for those of dangerous voltage.
The timing will operate according to the controller operation mode:

 In NORMAL operation mode, the LEDs of the different circuits are switched off after a certain time.
 In ASSEMBLY REMOTE COMMAND, INSPECTION and MES modes, all the LEDs remain on.
 If there is an error on the controller, all the LEDs will remain on until the error is reset, whether in an
automatic way or by the technician action. It will always be a timed off switching.
 If there is an error on a board, its LEDs will remain on. For instance: if there is no CAN-BUS
communication, etc.
 When indicated by the console or the PC.
Some actions are associated to sound alerts, mainly related to the lift motion, but they also can be emitted when
shifting from normal mod to test mode.
6.5 Tools: MP ecoGO console and MP ecoGOTools

As defined at the beginning of this chapter, MP ecoGO controller is provide with 2 local tools for setting: MP ecoGO
console and MP ecoGOTools application for PC.
6.5.1 Connecting point for console and PC

The tools can be connected to 3 different points of the controller unit:
 Controller: MCB board

 Car roof: REV board
 COP: CAR board
Every board is provided with a DB9 female connector for connecting the tools.
6.5.2 Console
6.5.2.1 Console definition
MP ecoGO console is a device which have been designed to help in the lift assembly, commissioning and
maintenance jobs.
V101 - 03/2017 100/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The console consists of 3 parts:

 Top area: for accessing the microSD card.
 Front area: where the screen and keypad are.
 Bottom area: it is the interface area for connecting the console to other devices. There are 3 connections:
o DB9: standard connection to MP ecoGO controller. This connector is used for connecting to the
controller via CAN-BUS protocol, but also for the electric supply of the console.
o Micro USB: USB slave mode connector; restricted use.
o RJ45: Ethernet connector of 10 Mb; restricted use.
In addition, a loudspeaker and battery pack are provided inside the console. It is a trickle charge battery pack.
Therefore, both via DB9 connector and via micro USB connector, it is recommended to keep the console connected
for at least one day to get it charged. The battery life is less than one hour with the screen on, while it is of
several hours when the screen is off.
6.5.2.2 Keypad
MP ecoGO console is provided with a green membrane keypad, where the keys are identified in white.
The keypad consists of following keys:
KEY ICON DESCRIPTION
On/Off and Standby
Home.
Function
Call to top or bottom floor, depending on the lift position
Opening and closing the doors. If the doors are open, it will give the order for closing
and vice versa
V101 - 03/2017 101/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

KEY ICON DESCRIPTION
Direction arrows and confirmation key (OK)
Back/delete
Where:
 Key for on/standby: to switch on the console, you shall press this key for about 5 seconds, then, release
and wait for the screen to switch on. This process usually takes about 40 seconds. To switch off the
console, there are two possibilities:
o Off: press the On key until the screen is Off.
o Off menu: press the On key until the menu for selecting between Off and Standby appears.
 Key for “Home”: the home key enables to come back to previous menus and, from main menu, and to
come back to previous application. When keeping the key pressed, the ongoing application version will
appear. From the App launcher, the key shall be briefly pressed to get the version displayed, as a long
pressure activates the process for updating applications.
 Key for function: the actions executed by this key are different depending on the application and are
usually described on the screen bottom part.
 Key for call: it moves the lift to the top floor, if it is not located there and to the bottom floor when it is at
the top floor.
 Key for opening/closing the doors: depending on the position of door panels, it send to the controller the
order to open/close the doors.
 Key for direction arrows: it allows the user to navigate through menus and screens, according to the
chosen direction.
 Key for de confirmation: it confirms an action.
 Key for going back/delete: in a dialogue box, it allows the user to delete or, in some cases, to come back
to previous menus.
Depending on the application, some of these functions may vary. The new functions will be described on the
screen bottom part.
6.5.3 MP ecoGOTools
MP eoGOTools are a set of PC tools within a common frame. Like for the console, they are designed to help in the
lift assembly, commissioning and maintenance jobs.
But they also have other uses, like:

 Burning the electronic boards firmware
 Setting the curves of the inverter speed and current
 Configurator of TFT-070E display
 Vía Serie / DSP console
 Installation analysis
 Etc.
6.6 Other tools: GUIA and TFT-070E display

6.6.1 GUIA module
The built-in console (GUIA) is a device designed to help in jobs for assembling, commissioning and maintaining the
lift. Unlike the MP ecoGO console, this module is an extension of the command panel and it cannot work out of it.
V101 - 03/2017 102/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The functions available are same of MP ecoGO console, but the keypad layout is different, adapted to the position
into the cabinet where it is located. Concerning the keys, they are same number and have same function.
6.6.2 Simulating the console on COP provided with TFT-070E display

When the car display is a TFT-070E, MP ecoGO controller makes possible to use the COP for maintenance jobs.
The COP may become a console to execute some apps by combining some keys, as it will be explained further.
The aspect and operation of these Apps will be similar to the ones on console or PC, except for the adaptation to
the COP keypad.
6.6.2.1 Access mode

The activation is made in TEST mode, while being inside the car and activating at the same time the pushbuttons
for opening and closing the doors. At this point, an activation code shall be introduced by using the pushbuttons of
the two bottom floors (on a numeric keypad, the used keys are “0” and “1”).
The activation code is a series of 0 (bottom floor) and 1 (the following one upward): 001111. This function is
automatically deactivated when the controller exits the TEST mode. It may also be deactivated by means of the
code 111111. The console simulation on the COP will be disabled, the el display and the keypad will return to their
normal function.
6.6.2.2 Keypad
After entering the console simulation on COP with TFT-070E, the COP usual function is disabled.
Now, the available App is MonitorECO and the assignment to the keys is the following one:
 Pushbutton to bottom floor: left arrow/left motion.
 Pushbutton to the floor immediately before the bottom ne: right arrow / right motion.
6.7 Applications (Apps)

The Apps are a set of applications making up the MP ecoGO console and MP ecoGOTools. The operation mode of
the Apps for PC and the console is similar, except for the appearance which is adapted the specific environment.
MP ecoGOTools incorporates all the console Apps, and other specific ones.
The set of applications implemented on the console or on MP ecoGOTools is not closed. The console and MP
ecoGOTools are designed to incorporate future updates in an automatic way. Some Apps may require specific
authorisations, some others will charge a fee and shall be purchased at our web, at SERVICEnter.
The Apps have the capability to handle up to 32 languages and will be available at least in 4, Spanish, English,
French and German.
6.7.1 Launcher App

Launcher App allows the user to access the set of available applications, as well as to manage the keys, the user
profiles and select the language.
This application is very intuitive and visual.
V101 - 03/2017 103/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Console MP ecoGOTools
6.7.2 MonitorECO App

MonitorECO App provides a general overview of the controller status. The screen consists of two areas:
 Left area: it is the fixed area and, from top to bottom, it shows:
o Controller operation mode and, if any, the error type.
o Status of the doors, weight in car and photocell.
o Motion direction and, in white, the floor to which the car is moving, in green, if the car is at floor
level.
o The car speed and its position, in millimetres.
 Right area: : it is the mobile area allowing to choose among 5 tabs:

o General (GEN): it shows 3 types of information:
‐ Status of power supplies and batteries
‐ Status of the safety chain
‐ The error description or the causes, if any, preventing the lift from carrying out a service
o Communications (COM): The boards connected and their status, organised into 4 communication
buses: Auxiliary circuit, Controller, Shaft and Group of lifts.
o Calls (CALLS): it shows the calls recorded, both from car (screen top area) and landings (screen
bottom area).
o Inverter (DRV): it is split into three parts:

‐ The screen top part shows the inverter position on the speed curve.
‐ The screen middle part shows the status of contactors, brake and motor thermal probe.
‐ The screen bottom part shows the voltage existing on the capacitors and the current
which is being supplied to the device.
o Levels and safety area (MAG): it shows the position, the polarity and the length of the magnets
of the floor where the lift is.
V101 - 03/2017 104/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

You can move through the different areas by using the right and left arrows. When clicking OK, the call menu will
appear.
6.7.3 Parameter manager App

MP ecoGO controller is provided with a parameter manager allowing, on the one hand, to visualise and change the
values of the controller parameters and, on the other hand, to stock or restore a set parameter values which are
physically located in the PC or in the console.
The parameter screen is split into two areas:

 Left area: it shows the different groups (folders) in which the parameters have been organised.
 Right area: it shows the parameters and their values.
The parameters are divided in four main groups: Controller, Inverter, Power supplies and Telephony.
Every group is associated to particular board and, in the event this board is missing, the parameters would remain
inaccessible:
The group-board associations are:
 Controller: associated to the MCB board
 Inverter: associated to the inverter board.
 Power supplies: associated to the ALIM board.
 Telephony: associated to the LINK board.
App of Parameters viewed on the PC:
V101 - 03/2017 105/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The considered operations are:

 To read or update a parameter.
 To read or update a folder.
 To read or update all the parameters.
 To stock set of values in the PC or in the console.
 To read a set of values stocked in the PC or the console.
The three first operations are working directly with the boards and require them to be connected. The two last
ones are working offline, without the boards being connected.
The parameters introduced or modified in the application are not directly updated on the controller. To get this,
the saving options of folders and parameters shall be selected.
Though basically the console and PC Apps have same functions, the MP ecoGOTools bring a set of additional
functions.
6.7.4 Error manager App

The error App allows you to visualise the 64 errors socked by the controller. Together with every error, MP ecoGO
controller stocks what we call the “error trace”. This is a set of values of the controller’s main variables at the
same moment in which the error occurred. This variable set will let us know the controller status at the very
moment of the failure and help to discover its cause.
Errors are classified in 8 folders:

 General: state the error code and description, as well as the family and the controller operation mode.
 General I: control internal variables.
 General II: control internal variables.
 Doors: variables related to the control of doors.
 APA: variables related to the levelling.
 MCB: motion control variables.
 DRV: inverter control variables.
 Others: variables related to the power supply and the temperature.
The errors can be stocked in a file, for an offline later analysis.
6.7.5 Adjustment App

MP ecoGO controller requires a series of operations before exiting the Inspection mode or the control via the
assembly remote command for shifting to Normal mode. These operations are called “ADJUSTMENTS” and
consider the following aspects:
 Local setting
 Power supply
 Machine setting
 Parameters of the installation
 Accelerometers calibration (in the box of connections)
 Learning
 COP
 Weighing calibration
“ADJUSTMENTS” App is available in two platforms: MP ecoGO console and MP ecoGOTools, the application for
PC under Windows 7 or 10 OS.
V101 - 03/2017 106/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The associated icon is
By clicking, the here below steps to be followed will appear.
The description of all this App modules is in chapter about “Adjustments and commissioning”.
6.7.6 App for commissioning tests (according to EN 81-1, EN 81-20/50)

This App is responsible for a set of modules; every module is associated to a commissioning test of the lift. These
tests are the ones stated by standards EN 81-20/50, EN 81-1, as well as others which are not mandatory but often
used.
The commissioning tests and their execution are described in chapter about “Adjustments and commissioning”.
6.7.7 Vía Serie console App

The Vía Serie console App is a replication of the console for Vía Serie controller and DSP inverter. When using this
App, the MP ecoGO controller will appear like it would be seen in Vía Serie or DSP inverter.
This App is only available in MP ecoGOTools.
6.7.8 App for Information of boards

The App for Information of boards allows the identification of the boards connected to the different controller
buses. For every board, the application will show:
 The manufacturing company.
 The board identification.
 The serial number.
 La version and date of software.
 A picture of the concerned board.
V101 - 03/2017 107/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

6.7.9 Firmware updating App

The firmware updating App allows you to change the firmware of every board making up MP ecoGO.
The left panel shows the boards connected, while the right panel displays the available software versions.
The application searches new boards every 10 seconds and the remaining time appears in the bottom box of the
left panel.
To update the software version of a board, select the boards on the left panel and the software version on the
right panel, as shown in the figure:
V101 - 03/2017 108/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Then, click the icon and follow the instructions.
The management of software versions is carried out with the manager module. To call it, click the icon
located in the left top area. The following screen shall appear:
A software version can also be introduced in a quick way, by clicking “Add version” button, located on right bottom
corner.
V101 - 03/2017 109/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

7 ADJUSTMENTS AND COMMISSIONING

7.1 Batteries
MP ecoGO controller is provided with a set of batteries supplying the energy required for rescue operations and
emergency calls.
When the charge level of batteries is not enough to ensure the mentioned functions, the controller MP ecoGO will
not allow the inspection mode operation, nor normal.
The battery charge is a slow process which can take about 1 day. Thus, the charge shall be started as soon as
possible. For this purpose, the SIO selector shall never remain in OFF+ position for too long, as it disables the
charge circuit. If you need to switch off the controller, the SIO selector shall be shifted to OFF position.
7.2 Checking the installation

7.2.1 General inspection
Before proceeding to the lift commissioning, it is necessary to ensure that the electric installation has been
properly executed. To do that, first of all, possible improprieties of the installation shall be checked:
 Presence of damaged wires or harnesses.
 Presence of loose wires or out of their connectors.
 Earth connections non-existent or improperly carried out.
Then, check the specific circuits related in following sections.
7.2.2 Earth connections

The electric continuity between the earth connection and the metal components of the installation, susceptible of
an earth fault of dangerous voltage shall be checked. For this purpose, measure instruments and control methods
according to standards of the series EN 61557 shall be used. If other measure devices are used, those ones shall
have at least an equivalent degree of reliability and safety. In all cases, you shall ensure that the measure is made
on point free of paint or any other isolating substance.
The following measures shall be carried out throughout the installation:
THE INTENDED
RESULT IS LESS
TEST LOCATION ELEMENTS
THAN
(Ohm)
Earth main terminal – cabinet structure bolt 1
Earth main terminal – cabinet door bolt 1
Earth main terminal – socket earth terminal 1
Earth main terminal – earth top terminal 1
Earth secondary terminal – guide rail 1 1
CONTROLLER
Earth secondary terminal – guide rail 2 1
Earth secondary terminal – Earth terminal of connection box on
3
car roof (CCT)
Earth secondary terminal – landing door adjacent to the
1
controller cabinet
Earth terminal of CCT – structure of CCT 1
Earth terminal of CCT – car roof 1
CAR ROOF
Earth terminal of CCT - socket earth terminal 1
Car roof – door operator structure 1
SHAFT ELECTRIC PRE- Machine earth terminal (housing) – guide rail 1 / 2 1
WIRING DE HUECO Overspeed governor housing – guide rail 1 / 2 1
(MACHINE AREA) Brake resistor housing – earth main terminal 1
SHAFT ELECTRIC PRE-
WIRING DE HUECO Landing door of floor x – guide rail 1 / 2 3
(BETWEEN FLOORS)
SHAFT ELECTRIC PRE- Landing door of floor 0 – guide rail 1 / 2 3
WIRING DE HUECO
Socket earth terminal – guide rail 1 / 2 3
(PIT AREA)
V101 - 03/2017 110/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Electric protection block of controller Connection box on car roof (CCT)
Earth terminal of CCT
N 1 3 5 N 1
13 1 3 5 N
TCSM
FF FA
SMAIN
14 2 4 6 N
N 2 4 6 N 2
1 3 5 1 N 1 N 1 N
FSM1
FSM2
12 34 56 78
1 N
Main earth terminal of

QF QTC QAH QAC
FVEMC
controller
FMA
2N
XFMA1 XFMA2 XFMA3

2 4 6 2 N 2 N 2 N
Controller bottom area
Secondary earth terminal of controller
7.2.3 Checking the protection efficiency of RCDs

For this check, measure instruments and control methods according to standards of the series EN 61557 shall be
used.
7.2.3.1 Checking the RCD F230

 Find the 230 VAC-power supply connector of door operator named XRVOP1
 Put the tester in “∆ In” mode and select 30 mA
 Place the phase and neutral clamp in contact with power supply phase and neutral conductor, respectively
 Place the GND clamp anywhere on the cabinet metal sheet, avoiding painted areas
 Push the TEST button
 Check the RCD F230 is triggered and the result is less than 30 mA
7.2.3.2 Checking the RCD FA

 Find the 230 VAC-power supply connector of car lighting named XRVHC
 Place the phase and neutral clamp in contact with power supply phase and neutral conductor, respectively
 Place the GND clamp anywhere on the cabinet metal sheet, avoiding painted areas
 Check the RCD FA is triggered and the result is less than 30 mA
7.2.3.3 Checking the RCD F110

 Ensure the safety chain is totally closed (point 90 switched on)
V101 - 03/2017 111/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 Find the 90C terminal of connector XSMCM01

 Place the phase clamp in contact with the 90C terminal conductor
 Place the neutral clamp and the GND clamp anywhere on the door metal sheet, avoiding painted areas
 Check the RCD F110 is triggered and the result is less than 30
7.2.3.4 Checking the RCD FF

 Find the RCD FF
 Place the phase and neutral clamp in contact with RCD FF phase and neutral conductors, respectively
 Place the GND clamp on any metal sheet area, avoiding painted areas
 Check the RCD FF is triggered and the result is less than 300 mA
7.2.4 Checking the insulation resistance

The insulation resistance shall be measured between live conductors and the protection conductor connected to
earth. For this check, live conductors can be interconnected.
To do this, measure instruments and control methods according to standards of the series EN 61557 shall be used.
The disconnection of the electronic boards is required.
The following circuits shall be checked with regard to the earth:

1. Safety chain
2. Shaft lighting
3. Car lighting and socket
4. Pit socket and machine room
5. Operator power supply
6. Coils of machine brake
7. Machine coils
The intended results are in the following table:
CIRCUIT RATED VOLTAGE (V) TEST VOLTAGE (V) INSULATION RESISTANCE (MΩ)
≤ 500 500 ≥ 1.0
7.2.5 Checking the safety chain connection

To ensure the safety chain is properly connected, first of all, check that the whole safety chain is closed. If right,
all the LEDs of reading points on SASE board are lit. These points are: 10 – 40 – 60 – 70 – 80 – 90.
Check there are, at least, 110 VAC between the point 90 of connector XSMCM01 and the terminal block located at
the cabinet bottom.
10: Beginning of safety chain: this point is lit if there is voltage into safety chain (> 110 VAC)
40: End point of the breakdown section; between 10 and 40, you have:
 Contact of governor cable tension
 Contact of overspeed governor
 Contact of final limit switch
 Contact of safety gear
60: End point of the maintenance section; between 40 and 60, you have:
 Contacts of stop on roof , on machine and on pit
 Contacts of switching to inspection mode on car roof and on pit
 Contacts of trap
 Contact of balustrade
 Contact of door bypass mode
 Contact of MES mode
70: End point of door presence section for lift with hinged landing doors
80: End point of lock section of landing doors
90: End point of car door presence section
It shall be checked that, when opening a contact of any section, the LED associated to the end of this section and
the following ones are off. I.e., if the final limit switch is activated, points 40, 60, 70, 80 and 90 will be off and
only the LED of point 10 will remain lit.
7.2.6 Checking the connection of communication circuits

The communication circuits are:
 CAN – M: CAN of controller circuit
 CAN – B: CAN of group of lifts (for duplex installations)
 CAN – M: CAN of shat
 CAN – M: CAN of auxiliary circuit
V101 - 03/2017 112/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Common considerations for ALL OF THEM:
1. The circuits are provided with two terminal resistors of value 120 Ω, one for each circuit end.
The terminal resistors can be connected to the board in an external way or they can be part of their circuitry.
Therefore, these boards are considered terminals in terms of CAN circuit connection.
From the circuit connection viewpoint, the boards are considered as:
 CAN ends, where the terminal resistor is connected to the board:

o As an external element:
 ALIM board
‐ To CAL-CAH of XALLK, if there is no LINK board: CAN-A
‐ To CHL–CHH of XALCAN: CAN-H
 LOB board
‐ To CHL–CHH of XCAN: CAN–H
 MCB board
‐ To CBL–CBH of XMCBT2, lift 2 (in case of duplex): CAN–B
 MUXCAN board
‐ To CL0–CH0 of XMXOUT, lift 2 (in case of duplex): CAN–A
o As a circuitry element:
 DRIVE board (MP ecoGO INVERTER): CAN–M
 REV board: CAN-A, CAN–M
 LINK board: CAN–A, CAN–B
 MUXCAN board: CAN-A, CAN-H
 CAN transit, where there will NEVER be terminal resistor:
o AUDIO board
o CAR board
o DOC board
2. The circuits can be connected to any CAN in two different physical ways:
a. Branching, with 4-pole connector. The maximum length between the communication line and the
board shall not exceed 50 cm
b. Interspersed, with 6-pole connector. In this case, there is no length limit.
Some circuits have available connectors on the boards and, depending on the installation
features, they have electric bypass. If the 6-pole connector have no bypass, the CAN line is open
and it does not work.
These boards are:
 ALIM: XALPH for connecting AUDIO board
 REV:
‐ XRVDOC1: DOC board connection, single access
‐ XRVDOC2: DOC board connection, double access
‐ XRVCAU: AUDIO board connection
‐ XRVCAC: TEL board connection
XRVCMC: CAR board connection
 AUDIO: XAU for REV and ALIM board connection
 DOC: XOPCAN for connecting to REV
a b
Taking these connections into account, to check the proper connection of CAN:
 Carry out a full OFF of the installation: FF, FA in OFF position, SMAIN in OFF+ position
 On the connection rail, located in the bottom part of the controller cabinet, measure the resistance (Ω)
between the following terminals and its value shall be approximately:
CONNECTOR TERMINALS APPROXIMATE VALUE (Ω) (±2%)

XSMIH01 CHH-CHL 60
XSMCM01 CMH-CML 60
XSMCM01 CAH-CAL 60
7.3 Adjustment and setting of the controller

The controller MP ecoGO requires a series of previous operations before exiting the inspection or assembly remote
control mode and shifting to normal mode. We call these operations “ADJUSTMENTS” and they consist of the
following steps:
 Local settings
V101 - 03/2017 113/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 Power supply
 Machine setting
 Installation parameters
 Calibrating the box of connections
 Learning
 COP
 Calibrating the weighing
To carry out these actions, a software module called “ADJUSTMENTS” has been developed; it is available in
two platforms, Console MP ecoGO and MP ecoGOTools, application for PC with O.S. Windows 7 or 10.
The associated icon would be
When clicking on it, the following steps to be carried out will appear:
When these operations have been completed, the lift is ready to shift to normal mode. However, some details like
levelling fine adjustment, adjustment of comfort and telephony, they may be outstanding. They will be treated in
next chapter.
7.3.1 Initial settings
IMPORTANT! Before starting the adjustment, ensure that the installation assembly is proper and complete and
that the mains is connected (refer to chapter Assembly).
Check that the LEDs of the ALIM board do not show any error and that the board is supplied from the mains
network (refer to chapter, ALIM board errors). At this stage, the batteries may not be charged, this is natural.
Check that the boards work properly. To do so, check the information supplied by the LEDs associated to each one
(refer to chapter about Electronic boards). Use the “MonitorECO”, tab “COM” to check the boards connected.
If any board is not connected, check the relevant CAN-BUS circuit. Check whether the BUS is closed. To do so,
disconnect the power supply from the controller, measure with a multimeter the resistance of each BUS (120
ohms). Remember that the REV board is provided with connectors that shall be bypassed if the elements are not
connected.
In most cases, the adjustments can be carried out with the controller in INSPECTION or MES MODE. When the
time comes to shift it to NORMAL MODE, you will be explicitly directed to do so.
To perform the tests, the PC or the console shall both be permanently connected to the controller, via the points
put in place for this purpose (controller, COP and box of connections).
The adjustment applications require a constant communication with the controller. If this communication should
not exist or should be interrupted during the adjustments, the following screen would appear.
V101 - 03/2017 114/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The screens of any adjustment application are divided in 3 areas:
 Top area: Header. The ongoing adjustment and its stage are stated there. In addition, there are
 Central area: Body. The actions that are being carried out and the related information are stated there;
some procedures can also be activated or validated there.
 Bottom area: Footer. This area is devoted to the controller state, the errors and causes for non-starting.
At all times, we can cancel the tests or restart them .
7.3.2 Local configuration
The aim is to define the local settings of the controller; this includes the country where it is installed, but also the
date and time the controller works with.
With MP ecoGO you can associate to each country a series of predefined characteristics. These characteristics are
mainly associated to behaviours of electricity grid and telephone network, but other ones are also possible.
Currently, there is no predefined characteristic.
We shall not confuse the country with the language, the first one is associated to the controller and the second
one to the tools (Console, MP ecoGOTools).
The date and time will be used for recording errors and events occurred on the controller, both for those which are
recorded by itself and those which are sent to the alarm remote centre or sigma4lifts.
V101 - 03/2017 115/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

At the procedure completion, a screen displaying that the setting has been successfully achieved and the values
have been set to the controller will appear.
7.3.3 Power supply
During this step, an analysis for the three-phase mains connected to the controller will be carried out, but also for
the main internal supplies of the controller and the pack of batteries.
Before continuing, ensure that the ALIM board is powered and free of failures. To do so, check the LEDs (refer to
chapter “ALIM board”).
To start checking, click on “Start checking”, it is displayed in blue on the PC application.
V101 - 03/2017 116/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Then, the following values will be displayed:

 Voltage value the electricity grid.
 Power supply voltage of the auxiliary circuit. This voltage value shall be between 29 VDC and 19 VDC.
 Power supply voltage of the emergency circuit. This voltage value shall be between 29 VDC and 19 VDC.
 Battery voltage. For operation in NORMAL MODE, this one shall be greater than 25 V.
 The state of all the REV board fuses is displayed.
If everything is right, click on Next. If one of the voltage values is out range, there may be a problem on the
switch mode power supply or short-circuit on some circuits. Verify the installation.
Finally, the controller will show the electricity grid detected and ask whether it shall be set as the operation
voltage.
If it is right, click on Next. Otherwise, check the incoming mains. Currently, MP ecoGO supports only the operation
with 400 V-three-phase voltage.
If the procedure has been successfully achieved, the following screen shall appear:
V101 - 03/2017 117/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

7.3.4 Machine setting
This step is for setting the parameters related to the la machine. After it is set-up, the machine can be used to
move the car.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT MAKE ANY LIFT MOTION WITHOUT PERFORMING THIS STEP. The use of a machine
that is not set-up may be dangerous for the persons, the installations and even for the electronic equipment itself.
The machine setting consists of:
 Setting of the motor electrical features.
 Detection and setting of the machine turn direction.
 Adjustment of rollback. We call rollback of the installation the displacement that occurs at final phase of
the movement, normally in the load favourable direction.
Motor electrical features
At this step, we will get the electrical parameters of the motor. To do so, the setting application (PC and console)
is provided with a series of parameters already calculated, called profiles, covering the majority las machines used
in MP ecoGO installations.
First, check whether the machine has one of these profiles:
If yes, choose the appropriate profile and click on “SAVE PROFILE”. Profile names match the trade names of
machines, so that it should be easy to identify them.
If it is not within the predefined profiles, an autotuning procedure shall be carried out. To do so, choose
“autotuning” drop-down option from previous menu.
V101 - 03/2017 118/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The autotuning procedure is carried out in MES MODE and without load, so that the car shall be hung and the
cables shall be removed from the traction sheave. The screens will inform for each case which actions shall be
achieved.
As the machine data are not available, a series of parameters shall be set before starting the autotuning
procedure:
 Car speed in INSPECTION MODE.
 Car speed in ASSEMBLY REMOTE CONTROL MODE.
 Car speed in NORMAL MODE.
 Motor rated current.
 Suspension type.
These data shall be recorded on the controller, “SAVE DATA”, click on Next.
V101 - 03/2017 119/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

After all these operations are completed, the autotuning can start. To do so, press in a continuous the UP
pushbutton on the command panel until the application gives another instruction.
The application will let you know the procedure evolution.
If the autotuning has not been successfully achieved, the following screen will appear:
V101 - 03/2017 120/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

In the bottom part, the problem cause is stated (see chapter about errors); solve it and repeat the procedure.
If the procedure has been successfully completed, the following screen will appear:
Turn direction of motor
Depending on the machine location, the same turn direction of the machine pulley will correspond to an upward or
downward car motion. At this step, the relationship between these two movements is to be set.
This setting is easy: move the car via the pushbuttons on the command panel and check that the motion direction
is the wanted one. If yes, click on “YES”, if not, click on “NO”.
Rollback adjustment
When the car start moving, sometimes there are displacements in an unwanted direction and in a sudden way.
This phenomenon is called “rollback”.
When this phenomenon appears, it can be corrected by using the following screen.
V101 - 03/2017 121/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Move the car via the pushbuttons on the command panel and increase this value until the “rollback” disappears.
After this step completion, the machine will be satisfactory set-up and the following screen will be displayed:
7.3.5 Installation parameters

At this step, the application will display a simplified configuration of the controller, with parameters split into two
groups: on one hand the parameters related with the LIFT and, on the other hand, the parameters related with
the INSTALLATION.
Check that these parameters are right, otherwise correct the wrong ones.
V101 - 03/2017 122/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

7.3.6 Calibration of the accelerometers on roof connection box

The controller MP ecoGO is provided with a set of two accelerometers located in the two car roof box of
connections. These accelerometers shall be calibrated.
During the calibration procedure, the way chosen for fixing the box of connections will be detected. Following
issues shall be taken into account:
 The ways for fixing position of the box of connections on the car roof will be stated in the documentation
sent with the lift: it can be fixed in a vertical or in a horizontal position.
 After the calibration, the controller save this position. Should it be modified, the controller will issue an
error of accelerometers and the system will require a new calibration.
The following message can be sent during the calibration procedure. In this event, check the connections and
power supply, repeat the entire step.
7.3.7 Learning
The positioning system of MP ecoGO controller uses the machine encoder, as well as the magnets of both the
safety and level areas, as parts of the continuous and absolute positioning.
At the top and bottom floors, the safety area magnets have a different polarity, so that the controller knows when
the car is located at an end of the run. The bottom level magnet polarity is also different from the other ones to
inform that it is the bottom floor.
The positioning system is dependent on these elements for operating, so that it requires their location and lengths.
The learning procedure is aimed to record and check each one of these elements.
During the operation in NORMAL MODE, the controller will use the encoder as a positioning system and the level
and safety area magnets as elements for correcting.
If after the Learning any magnet moved, the process shall be performed again.
It is not possible to shift to NORMAL MODE without performing a successful Learning process.
The learning process is automated and, you just have to follow the steps indicated by the app. When the process
starts, the car will look for the magnet level of the bottom floor that will be established as the point of reference
and set to value 5000 mm.
V101 - 03/2017 123/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

After reaching the bottom floor, the car will make a travel upwards at low speed. The aim is to obtain as
accurately as possible the position of level magnet and safety area magnets for every floor. This operation might
take a few moments.
After the travel upwards is achieved, the car will carry out another one at rated speed to check the position of the
elements.
The learning process is completed when the car reaches again the bottom floor. At this point, the application will
show the number of de level magnets and safety area magnets read, their location and length.
V101 - 03/2017 124/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The most common length is 100 mm for level magnets and 400 mm for safety area ones, but it can vary according
to the installation.
Sometimes, the position reset process is not successfully completed. Then, you shall check:
 The position of the magnets.
 The proper setting of the inverter: for instance, hard decelerations or excessive gains may cause failures
in the learning process. The right machine profile shall be chosen.
 The magnetic reader position: the magnetic reader shall be aligned with the magnet and as close as
possible; the distance between the magnet and the reader shall not exceed two centimetres. A common
symptom for this problem is a reading of shorter lengths: for example, 385 mm for safety area magnets
and 95 mm for level ones. In severe cases, the magnet reading might even not be done.
Other considerations:
 The beginning position of safety area and level magnets at the bottom floor as well as the end position of
safety area magnet and level magnets at the top floor is estimation, because final limit switches prevent
the car from reaching these positions.
 At intermediate floors, the level magnet is centred with regard to the relevant safety area magnets.
 The bottom end of magnet level at bottom floor coincides with the bottom end of its safety area magnet:
they are bottom-justified.
 The top end of magnet level at top floor coincides with the top end of its safety area magnet: they are
top-justified.
 The magnetic reader reads the magnetic field generated by the magnet, not the magnet. Therefore, in
some cases, the length calculated can be greater than the real length.
 Check that the braking distance, “Braking distance” parameter of “Installation” folder, is 200 mm greater
than the value of the inverter parameter, “Braking distance of bench 1” in “Setting of bench 1” folder.
7.3.8 COP
In this case, the COP setting, its connections, the display sequence and the voice synthesizer are checked.
For that, first, confirm the setting (number of stops, type of COP) and whether it is in accordance with EN 81-70.
V101 - 03/2017 125/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

After these parameters are set, the test of COP’s pushbuttons starts. To do so, press the car pushbuttons and
check they correspond to the ones shown on the application screen.
After that, the application will request for the activation of the pushbuttons displayed on the screen and in order to
check the voiceover generated, the sequence appearing on the display and the light indicator coincide and are the
right ones.
7.3.9 Calibrating the weight

This step is aimed at calibrating the load cell and it is carried out in two parts: the calculation of the cables weight
and setting the system zero.
The calculation of the cables weight affects the installations where the load cell is located on the fixed point. For
that, the lift will make a series of travels:
V101 - 03/2017 126/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

And the calculated weight will be displayed on the screen:
If you click “Continue”, the application will request for a known load to be introduced into the car:
After that, click “Adjust current weight” and the controller will complete the calibration process of load cells.
Bear in mind that if you are using load cells located on fixed point, these are less precise than the ones located on
frames or ropes and there may variations of up to 25 kg.
V101 - 03/2017 127/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

7.3.10 Final adjustments

To increase the lift comfort, a series of additional adjustments like levelling, synthesizer and telephony shall be
carried out.
7.3.10.1 Levelling adjustment
To carry out the levelling fine adjustment, the stopping accuracy shall be ± 10 mm.
At every floor, the learning process assigns the centre point of its level magnet as stopping position. Therefore,
the stopping accuracy will depend on the proper position of the magnets.
Usually, during the level magnets placement, some small mistakes preventing the magnet centre from coinciding
with the landing door sill are made. To correct these deviations, there is a parameter associated to each floor
called “Car stopping adjustment”.
This parameter is used to correct deviations not greater than ± 40 mm. The parameter range is from 1 mm to 100
mm, which is the level magnet, where 50 is the value corresponding to the magnet centre point. Therefore, if this
value is decreased, the car will stop at a lower position. If, instead, it is increased, the car will stop at a higher
position.
To correct the stopping accuracy deviations, the adjustments described in here below sections shall be carried out.
7.3.10.1.1 Adjustment per floor
 Take the car to the bottom floor.

 When it is stopped at level, measure the unlevel existing between the car door sill and the landing
door sill.
 If the car sill is below the landing sill, increase the value of “Car stopping adjustment” parameter of
the 1st. floor, by adding the unlevel measured value.
 If the car sill is above the landing sill, decrease the value of “Car stopping adjustment” parameter of
the 1st. floor, by deducting the unlevel measured value.
 This process shall be repeated at all the other floors, always moving upward.
IMPORTANT: If there are deviations greater than ± 40 mm, the magnets shall be moved to solve them and a
new learning process shall be carried out.
7.3.10.1.2 Offset adjustment when moving downward
After the levelling when moving upward is completed, check the levelling when moving downward. To do so,
give an order for a downward travel to each floor. During this process, it is possible to observe a certain
unlevel at stopping; this unlevel will be constant and the same one at every floor. Usually, the lift stops at a
few millimetres before reaching the floor. The car door sill will be above the landing door sill.
This deviation correction is carried out via only one parameter, “Value for adjusting the levelling position”, in
the folder of inverter “Absolute positioning”. Introduce in this parameter the unlevel measure in millimetres.
V101 - 03/2017 128/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

After the completion of previous steps, the stopping accuracy shall have been corrected. To confirm this issue,
make an upward travel to every floor, then, make also a downward travel.
7.3.10.2 Telephony
MP eocoGO controller gives the possibility to use an analogue or a digital telephone. This option is available at
“Telephone type” parameter, in folder called “Safeties”.
Currently, there are 3 options:

 MP ecoGO: it is the option for digital telephony, integrated into MP ecoGO controller; it requires the LINK
board.
 Fonomac 3: it is the option for analogue telephony; it requires the Fonomac 3 telephone.
 NON-MP: it is the option for analogue or digital telephony using NON-MP telephones. The electrical pre-
wiring installation depends on the telephone selected and MP ecoGO controller is not compatible with the
telephones. Make the consultation for feasibility.
7.3.10.2.1 Setting for GSM network
There are two parameters to be set:

 Parameter for “LINK board identification”: introduce the reference the controller will use for being
identified at SIGMA platform.
 Parameter of “ICCID”: SIM cards are associated to a numeric string for the telephone operator to
identify them. This numeric string shall be introduced which is stated on the SIM card rear; this
is the number appearing just after M2M.
It is also stated on the letter sent with the activation in sigma4lifts service.
V101 - 03/2017 129/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

It is important to keep in mind that the MP ecoGO controller requires an operational SIM card. This card shall be
inserted into a base for this purpose on the LINK board. Check it is located at the right place (refer to chapter
about electronic boards, section LINK board).
7.3.10.2.2 Setting the telephone numbers for alarm
Here are set the telephone numbers to which MP ecoGO controller will call in the event an alarm pushbutton is
activated, both from the car, from the pit or from the car roof. The available telephones are:
 Alarm telephones 1, 2 and 3: these are the numbers to which MP ecoGO controller will call when the
COP’s alarm pushbutton will be pressed.
 Alarm telephone for technician: this is the telephone number to which MP ecoGO controller will call when
the car roof pushbutton or the pit pushbutton will be pressed.
 Telephone for test call: this is the telephone number to which MP ecoGO controller will call, at least every
72 hours, to make a test call, according to standard EN 81-28.
 Telephone for maintenance call: this is the telephone number to which MP ecoGO controller will call when
the battery charge left is less than 1 hour-speaking.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that all the telephone numbers are recorded.
7.3.10.2.3 Setting the CALL CENTER
If the service for alarm call is going to be managed by a CALL CENTER, most of those are automated and the
communication protocol shall be set. In this case, following parameters shall be set:
 Parameter named “ID identifier in CPC, P100 and CPMAC” protocols: set the reference the lift will use for
being identified at the CALL CENTER.
 Parameter named “General remote protocol of communication via tones in an alarm”: choose the protocol
for the lift to communicate with the CALL CENTER. The available protocols are CPC, P100 and CPCMAC.
The parameters are located in “Communications” folder, in “Identification” subfolders.
and “Telephones”
The established setting affects all the telephone numbers. However, a specific setting for each type of call can be
made. The parameters are shown in following picture:
V101 - 03/2017 130/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

IMPORTANT: The used telephone is Fonomac 3 or the integrated telephony option (MP ecoGO). The parameter
named “Operating mode of the car audio module”, in “Car audio” folder, shall also be set. Refer to setting the
synthesizer.
IMPORTANT: CHECK WHETHER THE COVERAGE IS RIGHT. The signal coverage may vary depending on the area
and the operator. It may also vary whether it is a voice transmission (it requires less power, value 10) or a data
transmission (it requires more power, value 20). However, this check is essential in every installation.
7.3.10.2.4 Synthesizer
MP ecoGO controller is provided with a synthesizer, integrated into the TEL board, for voice messages and pipped
music. In addition to the synthesizer mode, it also takes over functions in the alarm management, as an audio
terminal in car and manager of the alarm pushbutton. This function may be activated via the parameter named
“Operating mode of the car audio module”, with 4 available options:
 Deactivated.
 Synthesizer mode: the voice messages enabled are activated (refer to the parameters for Enabling the
voice messages).
 Synthesizer mode and Fonomac 3: the synthesizer mode is activated and, in addition, the alarm
pushbutton management through communications, which is required when the alarm telephone is a
Fonomac 3.
 Synthesizer mode and integrated telephone: the synthesizer mode, the alarm pushbutton management
and the management of alarm calls on TEL board are activated.
It is also possible to set which type of messages are emitted:
 Floor messages: enable the floor voiceovers.

 Door messages: enable the voiceovers for opening and closing of doors.
 Direction messages: enable the motion direction voiceovers.
 Special messages: not yet used.
 Telephony in car: enable the voiceovers for reassurance of the user in car.
 Telephony in remote mode: enable the voiceovers for locating the installation.
V101 - 03/2017 131/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

7.3.10.2.5 Auxiliary loudspeaker/ induction loop
If the installation uses an auxiliary loudspeaker or an induction loop, the component shall be configured. Both
options share the same terminal, XTLBUC, located on TEL board and, therefore, they cannot exist at the same
time.
The parameter is named “Function of XTLBUC terminal located on TEL board” and there are 3 options:
 None
 induction loop
 Auxiliary loudspeaker
IMPORTANT: the loudspeaker to be connected shall be of 8 Ω, with a maximum consumption of 2 W.
7.3.10.2.6 Control of audio volume
MP ecoGO controller allows to adjust the volume of audio elements, depending on their function and in an
independent way. The considered functions are:
 Synthesizer: the associated parameters are “Synthesizer volume of main loudspeaker” and
“Synthesizer volume of auxiliary loudspeaker”.
 Telephony an intercom: the associated parameters are “General volume of main loudspeaker”
“General volume of auxiliary loudspeaker”.
 Pipped music: the associated parameters are “Pipped music volume of main loudspeaker” and
“Pipped music volume of auxiliary loudspeaker”.
In addition, the microphone sensitivity shall be adjusted as well. For that, there are two parameters, according to
the assigned function:
 Microphone for telephony: when it is used as an emergency telephone.

 Microphone for intercom: when it is used as an intercom, with another element of the installation
(AUDIO boards).
The allowed adjustment considers 10 levels, where 0 is the lowest volume and 10 is the highest one.
V101 - 03/2017 132/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

7.4 Automated tests previous to the commissioning

MP ecoGO controller is provided with a series of elements and auxiliary connections to make easier the execution
of tests required by standards EN 81-1 and EN 81-20, before the lift commissioning.
In addition, the console and MP ecoGOTools have a support application allowing to carry out the tests in a short
time, providing a complete and objective test report. The application guides the technician throughout the each
test execution and it serves as an interface between him and the controller, informing each one about what to do
and at all moment.
This application is not available on the TFT-070E car display, nor on the remote tool, via sigma4lifts service. A
direct and permanent connection to the electric controller is required, for safety reasons as well as because regular
actions on the command panel and other devices of the controller are required during the tests.
Warning: all the tests shall be carried out according to the instructions of the relevant lift manual.
a) Preparing for carrying out the tests

Before starting the tests, the following issues shall be confirmed:
 The controller software supports this function: this implies that the version is MCB-200 or higher.
 All the points contained in sections about checking and adjustments have been successfully
completed: the lift has a proper shaft map, the weight and the accelerometers are calibrated,
etc.
When the tool is connected, console or MP ecoGOTools, select the application named “Commissioning
tests”.
Inside the application, there are three sections:

 General settings
 Test performing
 Results and reports
V101 - 03/2017 133/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Before carrying out any test, it is appropriate to enter the section of “General settings” to check the value
of same data. These are the controller parameters used during the test execution (for instance: the
loading and unloading floor of the lift or the balance factor). These parameters may not be required
during the previous jobs of assembly and adjustment, but they are essential to automate the test
performing.
b) Performing a test
To carry out any test, enter the section “Performing tests”.
Then, the tool will display the list of available tests. In addition to the tests required by standards EN 81-
1 and EN 81-20, this list contains other non-mandatory tests, which are usual in validation criteria applied
in elevator sector.
After a specific test has been selected, the execution sequence begins.
The application displays, first, a short description of test and its aims, in order to get the technician being
aware, at all moment, of the actions which are being carried out.
Then, the application will inform the controller and the technician the actions to be carried out, until the
test completion. The application will inform whether the test result has been successful or not and it will
display the values of associated variables, where applicable.
At every step, the application screen shows the following information:
 The heading shows the test which is being performed.
 The middle area shows the information about ongoing actions and it gives the capability to
validate them.
 The bottom area shows the controller status, as well as the possible errors or causes for non-
starting. Here, the option to continue with following step is also given.
At any time, the test can be left by selecting the box or restarted by selecting
V101 - 03/2017 134/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

At every test completion, the application ask whether the test data shall be saved. If yes, the controller
stocks these data’s together with the history of tests performed and gives the possibility to access them
in the future.
c) Obtaining a test report

To access this function, select the section “Results and reports”.
As already mentioned in previous section, the controller stocks the important results and data for all the
achieved tests.
The application captures these data when it connects to the controller and allows them to be visualised,
both in a global way and also specifically.
The application shows the list of tests performed, displaying the test name, the date and time of
execution, as well as the result.
When one of the tests is selected, the application shows all the data related to the mentioned test: lift
load, stopping floor, decelerations, etc. In addition, it makes possible to generate a report collecting all
the stocked data, in pdf format, as well as a test brief description.
V101 - 03/2017 135/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

8 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

The operation normal mode of the controller is stated hereafter, with emphasis on user interface elements.
8.1 Landing pushbuttons

The lift call is performed from pushbuttons of the LOPs. Usually, the installation will be provided with LOPs
containing one or two pushbuttons, depending on the operation mode type selected.
With a pick up operation mode, the LOPs are provided with only one pushbutton, usually identified with a double
arrow symbol, actioned both for moving up and down. In this operation mode, the controller serves one at a time
the calls, i.e., it deactivates all the calls while it is serving the ongoing call. In this situation, the controller lightens
the light indicators of all the landing pushbuttons to inform the lift is “busy”. The pushbutton light indicator whose
call is being served is flashing, to inform the lift is coming, while all the other ones are permanently lit. When the
lift reaches the floor, all the light indicators are turned off and, at the established timer end during which it gives
priority to car calls, it enables again the landing calls.
With a down collective operation mode, the LOPs are also provided with only one pushbutton, usually identified
with a double arrow symbol, actioned only for moving downward; if you want to move upward, first you shall
make the downward travel, then, you can move upward. In this operation mode, the controller stocks the calls to
serve them as soon as possible, taking into account that it is always an upward motion, up to the call issued from
the highest floor, then, moving downward and stopping at every call issued by lower floors. All the collective
controllers turn on the indicators belonging to activated pushbuttons to inform their calls have been “recorded”
and they will be served. This mode is used in buildings whose bottom floor is the exit to the street.
The up collective mode is similar to the down collective one, but to the opposite direction. The pushbuttons are
identified with an up arrow and the lift normal travel is, first, downward up to the lowest call, then, upward,
serving the calls issued from higher floors. It is used in underground buildings where the floor for exit to the Street
is the last one.
The collective-selective operation mode combines the down collective one, for floors located above the main floor,
and up collective one, for floors located below the main floor. At the main floor, there are usually two pushbuttons,
one for moving up and another one for moving down. It is a usual operation mode in buildings having both raised
floors and underground floors.
Finally, the full collective operation mode is provided with two pushbuttons at every flor, except at the extreme
ones, in order to enable upward and downward calls from any point of the building. The lift travels up and stops at
all the floors having issued upward calls recorded; when it reaches the highest call, it starts travelling down and
serves all the downward calls recorded. This operation mode is appropriate for buildings having a significant traffic
between floors.
Whatever the operation mode, the pressed pushbuttons trigger an audible signal, when they record the call or
they are ready to serve it. The operation mode shall be selected through a parameter of the controller.
In groups of lifts, where there is only one lift with particular features (for instance, adapted to disabled persons or
with access to basement), an additional pushbutton may be added for this call or a codified call may be
programmed: the controller understands it is a call for this particular lift when the call pushbutton is pressed for 5
seconds.
As an alternative to conventional calls made through pushbuttons, key switches may be supplied, as elements for
restricted call.
In addition to the call key switches, there may also be control key switches on the LOPs, in order to activate
several functions of restricted use: out of service, fire mode, priority call, etc.
8.2 Arrows and landing indicators

The arrow indicator for landings may have two different functions:
 Arrows for direction of next departure: they are only lit when the lift reaches the relevant floor, stating
the next travel, if it is pre-defined (only for collective controllers).
 Arrow for direction and next departure: in addition to providing the mentioned information, every time
the lift moves, it also states the motion direction.
V101 - 03/2017 136/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The landing displays show the following information:

 Landing at which the lift is.
 Motion direction, when the lift is moving.
 Lift status. When the lift is in operation, the displays shows the floor and direction. When they are out of
service, they show a cause warning about this absence of service: breakdown, maintenance, fire, etc.
The LOPs can also be supplied with other light indicators for specific functions:
 The indicator for “car here” is used with landing hinged doors without vision panel, to state that the lift is
at the relevant floor.
 The indicators for BUSY and AVAILABLE are sometimes used in installations with pick up operation mode.
 Other indicators: OUT OF SERVICE, FIRE MODE, etc.
8.3 Car pushbuttons

Car call pushbuttons may have two different modes of operation:
 Conventional calls: there is one pushbutton for activating every car call, identified with the representative
number or character of the considered floor. When a pushbutton is pressed, the controller activates the
pushbutton light indicator to state that the call has been recorded. The pushbuttons trigger a sound
signal, when pressed, both at the very moment calls are recorded and when these ones have already
been recorded.
Usually, the pushbutton of the floor for exit to the street is identified with some millimetres protruding
over the other ones and a green halo.
 Numeric keyboard. The COP has 12 pushbuttons to perform calls: digits from 0 to 9, [-] sign [*] symbol.
This system, similar to a calculator or a remote command, allows to dial the wanted call as if it was a
sequence consisting of several digits. For instance, if [-] is pressed, then [3], the controller receives the
call to landing [-3] or, if [1] is pressed, then [5], the controller receives the call to landing [15]. After
introducing the first digit, the controller will wait for some seconds, just in case a second digit is
introduced. The controller issues a sound short signal when it records the call (or it confirms its precious
record), showing on the car display the relevant floor number. On the other hand, when the dialled digit
composition does not correspond to any floor, the controller issues a long sound signal for wrong floor.
This system only supports a numeric identification for floors and it does not permit no letters, nor
symbols. The pushbutton identified with [*] activates a call to the main floor or for building exit to the
street. The numeric keypad allows the implementation of the required option for COP code access, both
before the car call making and directly as the car call activation.
With a pick-up operation mode, only the call record is possible; with a collective operation mode, the
controller records all the made calls. In every travel, the lift stops at every floor to/from which a call has
been recorded.
In addition to the call pushbuttons, the COP is provided with other command elements:
 Alarm pushbutton, yellow and identified with the symbol [bell].
When it is activated, the alarm siren rings and the rescue call is activated through the emergency
telephone. To avoid false alarms, the controller has a filtering system described at chapter Management
of alarms.
 Pushbutton for door opening, identified with the symbol [<|>].
Its activation stops the closing of doors and make them reopen.
 Pushbutton for door closing, identified with the symbol [>|<].
Its activation reduces the time established for doors open, to enable the passengers get in the car, thus
causing the doors to close in advance.
 Control key switches. Key switches associated to different functions for restricted use can be supplied:
out of service, Fire mode, priority call, etc.
8.4 Display and light indicator of car

The car display can show the following information. Depending on the model and the programming performed, the
different items can be visible or not.
 Floor at which the lift is: a maximum of 3 alphanumeric digits is shown for identifying every floor.
 Directory: it consists of a word or a short sentence accompanying the floor identification digits and give
more information about every floor; for instance: “Restaurant”, “Rooms 101-120”, etc.
 Motion direction: the display shows, through arrows, the lift motion direction.
 Floors having a recorded call: only on COPs with numeric keypad.
 Load level: a progress bar of the lift load. As load is being introduced in the car, the bar is being
completed.
 Overload indicator: when the maximum load permitted is exceeded, a flashing, light and sound signal is
activated with an overload pictogram.
 Indicator for lift under remote operation: identified with a monitor symbol, it informs that the lift may
receive remote commands performed by the maintenance technical personnel.
 Alert messages: these messages come from the maintenance company or from the management staff of
the building.
 Date and time.
 Temperature.
 Lift status indicators: when the lift is into service, the display shows the usual information already
described. When it is out of service, it shows an indication about the cause for this absence of service:
breakdown, maintenance, fire, etc.
V101 - 03/2017 137/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The COP can be also provided with other light indicators:

 Pictograms of the emergency telephone: it consists of two indicators, a yellow one meaning “ongoing
alarm call” and a green one, meaning “recorded call”.
 Rescue indicator: in red and identified with “SOS”, it is activated when an electro-manual rescue
operation is being carried out.
 Other indicators: out of service, fire mode, etc.
Finally, the car may also include indicators of motion direction on the entrance door, in such a way they are visible
from the landing. These indicators show, while the lift is running, the motion direction and, while it stopped at
floor, the direction of next travel. Usually, the up arrow is green and, the down one is red.
8.5 Acoustic signage for the user

MP ecoGO may incorporate a set of acoustic indicators for the general ease of the lift use and make it particularly
accessible for the visually impaired.
The voice synthesizer informs the passenger travelling in the car that the lift arrival at floor, by informing about
the number and the directory or the description of the mentioned floor. It can also inform about the motion
direction and the status of the doors. The audio is activated on loudspeaker of the COP.
The gong informs the user who is waiting at floor about the lift arrival, making a distinction of the arrival when
moving upward (one tone) from the arrival when moving downward (two tones) and from the arrival without
predetermined direction (three tones). The gong is activated from the car roof loudspeaker or from specific
loudspeakers, located on every LOP.
Finally, the acoustic signage is completed with the indicators of call pushbuttons, already described o previous
points.
The controller is provided with an additional function, called “Night mode” allowing to reduce the volume of all the
sound indicators or, even, to mute them, during a determined time slot, such avoiding possible disturbances
during the neighbours' resting.
V101 - 03/2017 138/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

9 MAINTENANCE AND SPARE PARTS

9.1 Tools for the maintenance
9.1.1 In general
MP ecoGO controller is provided with the elements required for performing, in a comfortable and easy way, the
most usual tasks required in a lift maintenance.
The most important ones are the advanced tools described is this manual sections devoted to console, GUÍA
module, TFT-070E display and sigma4lifts remote tool. These tools enable the monitoring of any controller
variable, the displaying of warnings and errors and the modification of setting parameters, among other actions.
However, the controller is provided with other elements enabling to carry out simple actions, very usual in
maintenance operations which are described hereafter.
9.1.2 Command panel

The command panel enables to carry out a large set of usual operations,
through its different actuator devices. Furthermore, it provides the basic information
about the lift status.
Warning: all the light indicators of the command panel are subject to the energy-
efficiency criteria described in the relevant section.
Alarm indicator: identified with the bell icon in yellow, it is lit when the lift is in an
ongoing process, generated by the activation of any alarm pushbutton in the
installation. At chapter about management of alarms, the alarm process is described
in detail.
Level indicator: identified with LEVEL in green, it is lit when the car is at any floor
level. It remains activated even when the controller is off.
Up arrow indicator: it is lit whenever the car makes an upward motion. It is not
associated to the order given to the lift to move upward, but to the car real upward
motion. It remains activated even when the controller is off.
Down arrow indicator: it is lit whenever the car makes a downward motion. It is not
associated to the order given to the lift to move downward, but to the car real
downward motion. It remains activated even when the controller is off.
Up pushbutton: in NORMAL and TEST modes, it enables to make calls to the top floor,
through a normal activation, or to the floor immediately above, through a long
activation (more than 3 seconds). In MES mode, it enables to move the lift up.
Down pushbutton: in NORMAL and TEST modes, it enables to make calls to the
bottom floor, through a normal activation, or to the floor immediately below, through
a long activation (more than 3 seconds). In MES mode, it enables to move the lift
down.
Switch for shaft lighting: it enables to switch on and off the shaft light.
SIO selector: it is the switch for switching on and off the controller, but alto for activating the electromanual
rescue:
 In OFF+ position, it switches off the controller and the auxiliary circuit.
 In ON position, it switches on the controller and the auxiliary circuit.
 In OFF position, it switches off the controller and keeps the auxiliary circuit on. This position enables the
battery charge.
 In RES position, it switches off the controller and prepares the auxiliary circuit for the electromanual
rescue operation.
 In RES GO position, it carries out the brake activation associated to the electromanual rescue.
MODE selector: it enables to choose the controller operation mode. It has no function when the controller is off.
 In MES mode, the lift only moves through the activation of the command panel pushbuttons, by
bypassing a large part of the breakdown section in the safety chain, according to EN 81-1/2 14.2.1.4 c)
and EN 81-20 5.12.1.6.1 d). After the lift motion in MES mode, the controller makes an automatic reset
to the bottom floor to restore the position control. Warning: the MES mode is cancelled by the
INSPECTION mode activation, having the latter the priority upon the first.
 In NORMAL mode, the lift moves according to use conditions established for the final user.
V101 - 03/2017 139/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 In TEST mode, the lift disables the landing calls and the movements of automatic doors after they have
been closed. In this mode, the test previous to the commissioning are performed and the special
functions are enabled and activated through a code on the COP. It is possible to open and close the doors
by activating, for 10 seconds, the landing pushbutton of the floor at which the car is. The closing also
occurs in an automatic, after the doors have remained open for 5 minutes.
 The temporary activation of TEST+ mode is required to perform some tests.
BP selector (bypass): it enables to bypass, in a safe way, the different sections of door contacts in the safety
chain. When BP selector is activated (a position different from OFF), the lift does not work in NORMAL mode, but
the operation in MES or INSPECTION mode is possible. In these cases, when the lift moves while any section of
chain is bypassed, a flashing, light and sound signal in car is activated, to alert about the lift motion.
 In OFF position, the series bypass is deactivated.
 In SPE 60-70 position, you can carry out the bypass of the contacts of landing doors. With hinged landing
doors, the bypass only applies to the contacts of presence.
 In SCE 70-80 position, you can carry out the bypass of the interlocking contacts of landing doors. This
position is only efficient with hinged landing doors.
 In SPC 80-90 position, you can carry out the bypass of the contacts of car door(s).
Warning: in this case, the lift motion requires car door panels to be closed, even if the interlocking
contact is not activated.
9.1.3 Block of electrical protections
The block of protections contains the main

disconnector and the protection of electric devices:
magneto thermal switches and, optionally, RCDs.
SMAIN main disconnector enables to cut the mains

power and to switch off the controller.
Warning: SMAIN does not cut the auxiliary

circuit, as informed at section “Switching on and
off the controller”.
V101 - 03/2017 140/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

9.1.4 Inspection commands

The inspection commands are located on the car roof and in the pit (the latter only for
installations according to EN 81-20/50).
The inspection mode is activated by shifting the selector of the inspection command to
INSPECTION. This mode has the priority over any other controller mode; therefore, the lift
will remain in inspection as long as the technician keeps the selector in this position.
The inspection mode allow the lift to be moved, at inspection speed, through the whole
travel, except when there are special constraints, due to reduced pit or headroom or other
particular aspects of the shaft that may reduce the travel in inspection mode. When the lift
reaches the travel limit, the controller automatically stops it and it only allows the motion
in the opposite direction.
The speed inspection is set via parameter and it can take values between 10% of the lift
rated speed and 0.30 m/s. The factory-set default value is 0.30 m/s.
All the inspection commands are provided with 3 pushbuttons: up, down and run. To move
the lift, one of the direction pushbutton and the run pushbutton shall be activated at the
same time.
When the pit inspection mode and the car roof one are activated the same time, the lift
motion only occurs when the same motion direction is activated on both commands.
MP ecoGO controller monitors the contact status of the inspection commands. For this, it
requires the pushbutton activation to be carried out according to a determined sequence.
First, the run pushbutton shall be activated; after, the one of motion direction, up or down.
Otherwise, the lift does not perform any motion and it emits a sound signal of failed
command, and the controller will display the relevant alert. Likewise, to get the monitoring
completed, the deactivation shall be made by releasing first the motion direction
pushbutton and, after, the one of run. If desired, this monitoring can be deactivated via
parameter, but it is recommended to keep it activated.
During a motion in inspection mode, when the controller detects any failure on the
pushbuttons of the inspection command, it activates an intermittent acoustic signal of alert on the car roof as long
as the failure persists.
When the job in the shaft has been completed and the selector of the inspection command has been taken back to
its NORMAL position, the controller remains, transiently, out of service, until one of the following actions is carried
out:
- Shift the controller to MES mode and back to normal mode, by means of the SIO selector, on the command
panel of the controller.
- Activation of one landing pushbutton for 10 seconds. If the inspection mode has been activated from the pit
command, the pushbutton to be activated shall compulsorily belong to a LOP located at the floor giving access to
the pit.
After this action, the controller dispatch the lift to the bottom floor, to recover the position control, and it actually
shifts the lift to normal mode.
9.2 Specific functions for the maintenance

9.2.1 Functions activated via a code on the COP
MP ecoGO controller is provided with a series of specific functions to make easier the maintenance jobs, activated
through the introduction of a code on COP, while the controller is in TEST mode.
To access the car inside, the landing pushbutton located at the floor where the lift is shall be activated for 10
seconds.
In all cases, the activation procedure is the same one: from inside the car and while activating at the same time
the pushbuttons for door opening and for door closing, a given sequence shall be introduce for activating the
pushbuttons of the two bottom floors (if it is a numeric keypad, for pushbuttons “0” and “1”). The code consists of
a series zeros and ones indicating the activation sequence of the bottom pushbutton (0) and the following one (1).
The enabled functions are:
 Lift stoppage with the roof at floor level, to allow a comfortable access to the car roof. This function is
activated with the controller in NORMAL mode, by introducing the code 010101 on the COP and, then,
activating a pushbutton of the LOP. When 10 seconds are elapsed, after the code introduction, if the
landing pushbutton has not been activated, the command is deleted and the process shall be started
again.
V101 - 03/2017 141/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 Simulating the console on the car display. This function requires a TFT-070E display and it allows to
simulate a programming console on the, as described at the relevant section of this manual. The
activation code for this function is 001111. This function is automatically deactivated when the controller
exits the TEST mode. It may also be deactivated via the code 111111.
9.2.2 Remote maintenance through sigma4lifts

sigma4lifts tool enables to make in a remote way most of the performances carried out, at jobsite, with the
console, as described at the relevant section of this manual.
9.3 Points for regular check

MP ecoGO controller carries out continuously a self-check of its components, and it shows the relevant warning or
error when it detects any trouble.
The most critical element is the battery package that shall be replaced every time the controller state the need.
Take into account that the controller will shift the lift out of service when the batteries do not guarantee the
charge level is enough to ensure the minimum emergency functions required.
9.4 Spare parts

All MP ecoGO spare parts are available on-line at SERVICEenter, accessible through the link
http://www.mpascensores.com/portal/web/servicenter.
V101 - 03/2017 142/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

10 SPECIFIC FUNTIONS
10.1 Management of alarms
10.1.1 Description of the alarm according to EN 81-28
The figure displays an alarm flowchart according to EN 81-28 Standard.
EN 81-28 ALARM PROCESS
10.1.2 Triggering an alarm

The alarm can be triggered by three different actions:
 COP Alarm pushbutton activated.
The trapped passenger must press the pushbutton for 5 seconds. The equipment will check the lift status and, if
applicable, will trigger the alarm (refer to “Alarm filtering”).
The car audio module will indicate that the alarm process has started through a yellow LED and the system will try
to connect with the alarm call centre. If connection fails, it will try again and again until it connects. The time
between attempts is configurable via parameters. The phone device will make three attempts to reach the call
centre at each of the three programmed numbers. Should connection fail after the third attempt made to the last
number, the process would start again from the first number and it would continue indefinitely until
communication is made and the corresponding call is registered.
V101 - 03/2017 143/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 Alarm pushbutton on car roof or under car floor activated.
The process would be similar to that of the COP alarm pushbutton although no previous filtering would occur, thus
directly triggering the alarm.
MP ecoGO controller has a specific telephone number for calls coming from these pushbuttons. If the user does not
want to use this specific telephone number, calls will be automatically redirected to the list of alarm telephone
numbers.
 Batteries not working properly or flat.
MP ecoGO controller has an internal emergency power supply and continuously checks the status of its batteries.
Should the controller detect incorrect operation or extended discharge of batteries, it will call the alarm centre
sending the corresponding alarm message, thus ensuring that, from that moment on, it has an hour of life
maximum.
This alarm is not subject to filtering and the calling process will be similar to that described in the previous items.
In addition, there is a specific telephone number for calls made for this reason.
10.1.3 Alarm filtering

Only the alarms triggered from the car COP are filtered. The alarms triggered from the roof or under the car floor
are not filtered; therefore, they are immediately sent. As a result, all the indications in this manual concerning
alarm filtering only refer to alarms triggered from the car COP pushbutton.
If alarm filtering is inhibited, any alarm triggered from the car COP will be sent to the call centre, regardless of the
lift status (situation not compliant with EN 81-28).
The alarm filtering inhibition is carried out via the parameter “ID = 184, alarm filtering EN 81-28”.
When the filtering is enabled, the equipment will send the alarm after checking the lift status, according to the
cases included in the EN81-28 Standard which are described below.
The first filtering situation is determined by the following conditions: if, on triggering the alarm, the lift is stopped
at floor level with the car door full open, the equipment will filter the alarm and will not send it. If the lift is
stopped at level and the doors are closed, the lift will attempt to open the doors. If it fails, the alarm will be sent
to the call centre.
On the contrary, if the alarm is triggered with the lift at a stop, but the two previous conditions are not
simultaneously met, the alarm will be sent to the call centre.
The second filtering situation is provided by the lift motion. If, when the alarm is triggered, the lift is in motion,
the equipment will withhold the alarm and wait for the lift to stop. After a few seconds, it will check up according
to the first situation by filtering the alarm if doors are not full open when the lift is stopped at level.
When the lift is working in INSPECTION or MES mode, the equipment does not filter the alarms.
V101 - 03/2017 144/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

XALLK XLK1
CAN
ALIM AUX
LINK
XALCAN
CAN AUX
XRVCAN
24A
CAN AUX XRVEA
XTLCAC SARI SARI
XRVCAC
TEL 24A
XRVARFL
SARF SARF
XTLPLF
24A
PAL XRVPOSL
NA SNA
XDCPLF
REV XRVARP1
24A
SARP SARP
CAR
24M PAL
XDCPAL
PAL
10.1.4 Lift identification

It is carried out at the Receiving Centre of Alarms or Rescue Service. It may be done in a manual or automatic
way.
MANUAL MODE:
 Building: The receiving telephone displays the building telephone number. The building is identified using
the list of telephone numbers and their corresponding building.
 Lift: The equipment transmits a sequence of “beeps” corresponding to the “Lift Number” parameter value.
Therefore, for Lift 1, 1 beep will be heard, for Lift 2, 2 beeps will be heard and so on and so forth.
AUTOMATIC MODE:
 It is performed by means of the protocols for alarm management available on the MP ecoGO controller
(CPC and P100).
V101 - 03/2017 145/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

10.1.5 Acknowledgement of receipt

Acknowledgement of receipt is the operation by which the call centre informs the alarm equipment and the user
that the alarm has been correctly received.
MANUAL MODE: Once the telephone is picked up at the call centre, the keys on the phone will enable the following
operations:
 Key 4: Acknowledgement of receipt. The telephone will shift its status by turning OFF the yellow LED and
the green one ON and will beep the number of times corresponding to the lift number.
During the whole process, it is a 2-way communication.
 Key 0: Hang up. It ends communication. If “0” is pressed before having acknowledged receipt, the alarm
will not be registered. Furthermore, the phone device will call again after one minute.
Very important: Although oral communication with the rescue centre is established and the situation of
entrapment is communicated, the phone device will not clear the alarm until the rescue centre registers the call by
pressing digit “4”.
AUTOMATIC MODE: It is performed by means of the protocols for alarm management available on the MP ecoGO
controller (CPC and P100).
10.1.6 Ending an alarm

Once the people trapped have been rescued by the authorised personnel, the latter will have to end the alarm.
To clear an alarm, the SIO changeover switch, located on the controller, shall be shift to position OFF.
10.1.7 Calling the lift from the Rescue Centre

The reception of incoming calls from the Rescue Centre must be allowed during the alarm process. The phone
device must be configured with this option enabled (“Automatic Reply” different from “0”).
The procedure for calling the lift is the following one:
 Call the lift telephone number.

 After the number of rings programmed in the phone devices, the call will be made.
 Dial the digits: “#” <lift number> “0”. For example, should you wish to call lift 1, dial “#” “1” “0” on the
telephone.
 The selected telephone will connect and the rest will disconnect after a few seconds.
 The call must be ended by dialling the key “0” before hanging up.
10.1.8 Test calls

The lift alarm system shall periodically make a test call in order to ensure it is working properly. This way, it is
guaranteed that it will work properly in case of entrapment. This test call must be made at least once every three
days.
The alarm system will perform a self-checking procedure that verify the device proper operation and will inform
about the checking result through the communication way set via parameters:
 Test call
 UDP data – sigma4lifts service
 SMS
Test calls can be received either in manual or automatic mode.
MANUAL MODE: Once the telephone has been picked up at the call centre, the procedure will be similar to that of
receiving alarms; that is to say, the test call must be confirmed by pressing key “4”. If not correctly confirmed, the
phone device will try again to call the same number.
AUTOMATIC MODE: It is performed by means of the protocols for alarm management available on the MP ecoGO
controller (CPC and P100).
10.1.9 Information the rescue service shall have

The Rescue Service shall have the following information:
 Log including building addresses and telephone numbers of the relevant alarm systems.
 Per building:
o Address and location of each the lift, identified by its relevant number (included in Appendix A).
o Descriptions of means to access trapped passengers (included in Appendix A).
o All the special risks concerning the building entrance and lift access (included in Appendix A).
 List of authorised personnel to perform a rescue operation and their corresponding authorisation codes to
clear the Alarm.
V101 - 03/2017 146/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 Periodic test log.

 Automatic test log.
 Alarm history log including cause of the alarm, their statuses with date and time, authorised rescuer to
clear the Alarm....
10.1.10 Information to the be supplied to the owner

The installer must inform the installation’s owner about the following:
 The installation’s owner must ensure that the lift connects to the rescue service.
 The information to be transmitted to the rescue service. See Appendix A.
 The need to always keep the alarm equipment in operation in order to provide two-way communication
with a rescue service.
 The need to cut the lift’s power supply if the two-way communication system is out of order.
 The regular check-up of the verbal response from the rescue service, by using the device(s) for initiating
the alarm (manual test).
 The information to use the alarm systems.
 The system’s minimum maintenance requirements.
 The information on how to change the dialling parameters, for example, telephone numbers, if they are
included in the alarm equipment.
10.2 Rescue of trapped persons

MP ecoGO integrates different systems enabling to resue the users trapped in the event of any lift failure, except
for a brake locking or a serious mechanical trouble (like, for instance, a severe car locking due to a safety gear
tripping). In those cases, auxiliary devices shall be used.
In the event of a power supply outage, the automatic rescue is activated, by using the energy of the emergency
batteries and taking into account the favourable direction for imbalance of loads, it takes the lift to the closest
floor and open the doors. When the trapped passengers are out of the car, the lift closes the doors and gets out of
service until the mains is restored.
In the event of a power supply outage while technician staff is working in inspection mode, the controller allows
the lift motion under the control of the inspection command, in the motion favourable direction. This way, the
trapped technician can access a landing door.
In the event of lift out of travel, slackening of ropes, stop caused by an overspeed or, even, a light car locking due
to a safety gear tripping, the MES mode, driven from the command panel, allows the lift motion to take it to floor
level. WARNING: the MES mode bypasses a large part of the breakdown section in the safety chain; therefore, it
shall exclusively be used by qualified technical personnel.
Finally, in the event of electric failure in the controller, the frequency inverter, the encoder or the machine motor,
the electro-manual rescue allows the brake opening and, in a controlled way, the lift can be driven to closest floor
level, in the favourable direction for imbalance of loads. The auxiliary circuit controls the lift motion during this
operation and it may stop it if the speed exceeds the permitted limit or if it reaches the level. WARNING: this
rescue system works when the controller is off, i.e., without the control from the safety chain; therefore, it shall
exclusively be used by qualified technical personnel. Before moving the lift, the qualified technician shall ensure
that the car door and the landing doors are closed and there is nobody de in the shaft.
10.3 Efficient management of energy

At all times, MP ecoGO controller makes an efficient management of energy by incorporating low consumption
components and avoiding unnecessary consumption.
10.3.1 Management of LEDs and light indicators

MP ecoGO keeps activated all the internal LEDs and light indicators, of electronic boards, electric boxes and
controller, as long as it is in aby working mode for elevator technical personnel: inspection, MES, TEST, etc.
However, when it is in normal mode, all these indicators are switched off after a lapse of time, as the controller
understands it is a useless information. The lapse of time during which the light indicators remain activated, after
shifting to normal mode, is configurable via parameter.
The technician may also activate the light indicators of the command panel through activating one of its
pushbuttons. The light indicators remain activated during the established timer from the last activation of
pushbuttons.
10.3.2 Management of car lighting

This function requires LED lighting.
The controller switches off the car light after a lapse of time, when the lift is parked, with doors closed and there is
no weight detected in the car. The time for keeping the light on, in these circumstances, is programmable via
parameter.
When a landing call is made, the controller reactivate the lighting before opening the doors.
V101 - 03/2017 147/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

10.3.3 First level of stand-by

When the lift reaches a certain downtime, what we call the first level of stand-by is activated. In this situation, the
controller switches off the inverter and all the car installation, but the LOPs remain activated, waiting for a call to
take back the lift to its normal status, 100% operational. In this situation, when a landing call is made, it takes the
controller less than 3 seconds for activating again all the elements switched off.
The downtime required for activating the first level of stand-by is programmable via parameter. Likewise, via
parameter, landing light indicators can also be included among the elements deactivated by this function.
10.3.4 Second level of stand-by

This function consists of the controller full switching off and the auxiliary circuit is the only one remaining
activated.
The second level of stand-by may be activated in two different ways:

 Programmable via parameter, after a certain downtime (this period shall be greater than the timer for
first level of stand-by). In this case, the auxiliary circuit takes the control of the landing call and it
reactivates the controller when it receives any call.
 Via programmed time per week. The controller gives the possibility to establish, for everyday of the
week, operating time slots of the lift, in such a way that the controller switches off and on, every day of
the week, at the established time. In this case, an additional reactivation device may be incorporated to
enable the lift to get back into service during the stand-by period.
It takes approximately one minute to get back into normal service, after a second level of stand-by.
V101 - 03/2017 148/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

11 PARAMETERS
11.1 ALIM board
Id Name Help text Values
-.Single-phase
38000 Mains network type It determines the mains network type.
-. 3-phase
-. 208V AC
-. 220V AC
It determines the rated voltage of mains network in
38001 Rated voltage of mains network -. 380V AC
volts.
-. 400V AC
-. 415V AC
Voltage range of mains network It determines the voltage range of mains network
38002
supported supported according to the rated voltage set in 38001.
Maximum electrical frequency of Expressed in Hz, it states the maximum electrical

38004
mains network frequency for the input voltage of the mains network.
Minimum electrical frequency of Expressed in Hz, it states the minimum electrical

38005
mains network frequency for the input voltage of the mains network.
It determines the number of consecutive electrical

cycles with an error in the input voltage wave that
38006 Electrical supply failure
shall occur to consider that there is a failure in the
electrical supply.
Anomalies of the mains network It determines which anomalies of the mains network
38007 detected by the phase are going to be detected by the phase monitoring
monitoring device device.
It determines which voltage to be applied to the brake -. 100V DC

38008 Brake voltage
during the rescue operation. -. 200V DC
Timer determining, in milliseconds, how long the brake

Voltage timer for the brake
38009 will receive 200V DC-voltage to be activated: after
activation
that, it will receive a maintenance voltage of 100V DC.
Range :
Minimum voltage from which When the battery voltage drops below the value set to 10.00..32.00
38010 the Alarm due to low battery is this parameter, the notification message will be sent
tripped anti t will generate an alarm. Default value:
25 VDC
V101 - 03/2017 149/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

11.2 MCB board
1 Number of stops It determines the lift number of stops. 1, 2, …, 32

-. Simplex
It determines whether the lift works in simplex -. Duplex
2 Type of installation
mode or in a group of lifts. -. Triplex
-. Group of 3 or more
-. 1
-. 2
It identifies the number of the lift within the -. 3
3 Number of the lift
group. -. 4
-. 5
-. 6
-. Pick up
It determines the strategy for call dispatching -. Collective-selective
4 Operation mode
of the controller. -. Down collective
-. Full collective
-. Manual
5 Type of doors It determines the type of lift doors -. Hinged
-. Automatic
It determines whether the doors remain open -. Open
6 Position of doors or closes when the car is parked and waiting for -. Closed
a call. -. Closed at main floor
-. 1
7 Number of accesses It determines the car number of accesses. -. 2
-. 3
It identifies the building floor leading to the
8 Exit floor of the building
street.
Floor for automatic despatch It determines to which floor the automatic -. Bottom
9
of the car despatch of the car will be carried out. -. Top
-. with pushbuttons
10 Type of COP It determines the COP type provided in the car.
-. with numeric keypad
It determines the number of people for whom
11 Number of people
the car is designed.
-. 3VF gearless
-. 3VF gearless non-MP
-. 3VF asynchronous
12 Type of drive It determines the lift type.
-. Hydraulic with MP
greenvalve
-. 3VF synchronous
It determines the type of positioning in the -. MP ecoGO
13 Type of positioning
installation -. Non-MP
It determines the distance required by the
14 Braking distance controller to stop the car in a comfortable way
for the user.
-. Direct
It determines the starting type of the hydraulic
15 Type of hydraulic starting -. Star/delta
lift.
-. Star/delta-GMW
In a group of lifts, it determines whether two
Vertical pre-wiring and LOPs -. No
16 lifts can share all the landing elements (shaft
shared -. Yes
wiring, LOPs, etc.).
17 Weight of the balance chain The weight of the balance chain is recorded.
18 Maximum time of operation Set the operation maximum time of the motor.
Set the maximum time available to get the car
Maximum time for door door closed (being understood that the door is
19
closing closed when the safety chain contact for car
here is closed).
It determines the time lap from the moment
the car reaches the floor up to the moment it is
20 Next call 1
ready to answer a new call; it applies at every
floor except the floor leading to the street.
It determines the time lap from the moment
the car reaches the floor up to the moment it is
21 Next call 2 ready to answer a new call. It replaces Next call
1 when the car is located at the building exit
floor.
It determines the alternative time lap to Next
22 Next call 3 call 1 and 2: it only applies when the parameter
43 set to a value different from 0.
V101 - 03/2017 150/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

After the car reached the floor, it determines

the extra time, added to "Next service", during
23 Timer of landing doors
which the car calls take precedence over the
landing calls.
Timer setting the maximum time during which
Maximum time for opening of
any door contact of the safety chain remains
24 the safety chain caused by
open before the failure "Time for opening of the
any door contact
door circuit exceeded" appears.
Timer replacing the time set to "Next call" when
Extension of time for door
25 the button provided in the car for door open
opening
extension is pushed.
Set the time, in seconds, after which the car
Time of despatch to the will be dispatched to the parking floor
26
parking floor
(0 = it does not apply).
Set the time when the lift start operating in
27 Start of night mode
night mode.
Set the time when the lift end operating in
28 End of night mode
night mode.
Set the time during which the doors remain full
29 Delay in closing of doors
open after they hit an obstacle.
Set the operation mode of call registering:
Fixed mode: the light indicator remains ON as

long as the call is registered.
Flashing mode: the light indicator is flashing

when the car is moving and fixed when the car
is stopped.
Advanced mode 1:
- When the car is stopped, but it has a
-. Fixed
destination or when it is busy, all the light
Registering mode of landing -. Flashing
30 indicators of all the landing records are fixed.
calls -. Advanced 1
- When the car is moving, all the light
-. Advanced 2
indicators of all the landing records are fixed,
except the destination floor one which is
flashing.
Advanced mode 2:
- When the car is stopped, but it has a
destination or when it is busy, all the light
indicators of all the landing records are fixed.
- When the car is moving, all the light
indicators of all the landing records are
flashing.
-. Motion direction
Set which information will be associated to the -. Motion
Information about the
31 indicator of the car motion. It will be shown at direction+Door open
direction of the car motion
every floor. -. Direction of next
departure
Light signal informing that one of the lift doors -. No
32 Light indicator of door open
is open. It is shown at every floor. -. Yes
-. No
Light indicator for Light signal informing that the lift is busy or
33 -. Busy
busy/available available. It is shown at every floor.
-. Available
Light indicator for "car here". It is shown at
every floor.
-. No
34 Light indicator for "car here"
It is only shown at the floor where the car is -. Yes
present and as long as the lift is stopped (for
lifts with semiautomatic hinged landing door).
Light indicator for "out of Light indicator for "out of service". It is shown -. No
35
service" at every floor. -. Yes
-. No
36 Gong audible signal Activate and deactivate the gong.
-. Yes
Compulsory stop at the Set that the car shall always stop at the -. No
37
building exit floor building exit floor. -. Yes
38 Filtering of car calls It allows you to apply different filters to the car -. It does not apply
V101 - 03/2017 151/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

calls to avoid a misuse of the lift. -. Filter for the

switching of contact of
door or photocell
-. Filter for nº the no.
car calls > 3
-. Filter for the no. car
calls > 6
-. Filter for there is
load inside the car
The lift starts the doors opening when it is still -. No
39 Doors pre-opening
moving, shortly before reaching the floor level. -. Yes
-. No
It corrects the stopping accuracy of the car to
-. Yes, with open doors
40 Re-levelling get it at floor level during loading and unloading
-. Yes, with closed
phases or due to the creeping for hydraulic lifts.
doors
Set the time it takes to start the car re-levelling
41 Re-levelling time
operation when the latter is required.
Determine whether the photocell signal is -. No
42 Photocell enabling
enabled or not. -. Yes
Depending on the value set to this parameter,
the controller will activate the timer of next call
-. No
3 (parameter 22) in the following conditions:
Activation of the alternative -. Car calls
43 0: if does not apply
timer for next call -. Landing calls
1: if car calls are recorded
-. Recorded calls
2: if landing calls are recorded
3: if any call is recorded
In normal operation mode, when the time, in
seconds, set to this parameter is elapsed, the
car light is switched off unless one of the
following conditions is met:
- The contact of landing hinged doors is open.
- The lift, configured for parking with doors
44 Timer for car lighting open, is at floor level and the contact of car
door lock is open.
- The contactors are activated.
- The landing call of the floor where the car is
located has been pushed.
- There is a load higher than 15 kg inside the
car.
It controls the volume of all the sound elements
-. Low
which are not related to an emergency situation
45 Volume of the sound elements -. Medium
(for instance: pushbuttons, gong synthesizer,
-. High
etc.)
-. No
46 Night mode Activate the night mode operation.
-. Car parking
Code for special operations Access code for carrying out special operations
47
from the car from the car.
-. Individual
Criterion for assignment of Define the criterion for the assignment of its
48 -. Group
parking floor parking floor to each lift.
-. Smart
Set the level of 1 parking floor that will be used
49 1 parking floor by the parameter "Criterion for assignment of
parking floor".
parking floor".
parking floor".
Landings where the dispatch -. None
Set the landings where the automatic dispatch
52 to the parking floors is not -. Lowest landing
to parking floors is not enabled.
enabled -. 2 lowest landings
-. It does not apply
Enable the simulation mode allowing an
-. Levels+pulses
53 Simulation mode automatic simulation of some elements in the
-. Calls
installation, like levels, pulses and calls.
-. Levels+pulses+calls
It determines whether the ESM1 terminal, -. No function
Function of ESM1 terminal of
54 located on the MCB board, acts as an input (E-) -. E-EN 81-73
MCB board
or as an output (S-) and its function. Evacuation floor
V101 - 03/2017 152/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

-. E-EN 81-73
Alternative floor
-. E-EN 81-73 Fire
deactivation
-. S-EN 81-73
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
-. S-EN 81-72
-. Governor tripping
Set the activation logic of the function defined
for the input/output ESM1 of MCB board.
If it is an input:
- With voltage of 24V DC at the input, it
activates the function assigned at parameter
54.
- Without voltage of 24V DC at the input, it
Logic of ESM1 terminal of MCB activates the function assigned at parameter -. Without 24V DC
55
board 54. -. With 24V DC
If it is an output:
- With voltage of 24V DC at the output, when
the function assigned at parameter 54 is
activated.
- Without voltage of 24V DC at the output,
when the function assigned at parameter 54 is
activated.
-. No function
-. E-EN 81-73
Evacuation floor
-. E-EN 81-73
Alternative floor
It determines whether the ESM2 terminal, -. E-EN 81-73 Fire
56 located on the MCB board, acts as an input (E-) deactivation
MCB board
or as an output (S-) and its function. -. S-EN 81-73
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
-. S-EN 81-72
If it is an input:
56.
57
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
-. No function
-. E-EN 81-73
Evacuation floor
-. E-EN 81-73
It determines whether the ESM3 terminal, Alternative floor
58 located on the MCB board, acts as an input (E-) -. E-EN 81-73 Fire
MCB board
or as an output (S-) and its function. deactivation
-. S-EN 81-73
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
V101 - 03/2017 153/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

-. S-EN 81-72
If it is an input:
58.
59
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
-. No function
-. E-EN 81-73
Evacuation floor
-. E-EN 81-73
Alternative floor
MCB board
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
-. S-EN 81-72
If it is an input:
60.
61
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
-. No function
-. E-EN 81-73
Evacuation floor
-. E-EN 81-73
Alternative floor
MCB board
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
-. S-EN 81-72
Logic of ESM5 terminal of MCB -. Without 24V DC
63
board If it is an input: -. With 24V DC
V101 - 03/2017 154/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

62.
62.
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
-. No function
-. E-EN 81-73
Evacuation floor
-. E-EN 81-73
Alternative floor
MCB board
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
-. S-EN 81-72
If it is an input:
64.
65
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
-. No function
-. E-EN 81-73
Evacuation floor
-. E-EN 81-73
Alternative floor
MCB board
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
-. S-EN 81-72
If it is an input:
Logic of ESM7 terminal of MCB 66. -. Without 24V DC
67
board - Without voltage of 24V DC at the input, it -. With 24V DC
66.
If it is an output:
V101 - 03/2017 155/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

activated.
activated.
-. No function
-. E-EN 81-73
Evacuation floor
-. E-EN 81-73
Alternative floor
MCB board
-. E-Out of Service
-. S-Out of Service
-. E-EN 81-72
-. S-EN 81-72
If it is an input:
68.
69
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
-. None
Set which standard determines the behaviour of
70 Type of fire operation -. EN 81-72
the lift in the event of fire.
-. EN 81-73
Landing for evacuation in the Set to which landing the car shall be lead when
71
event of fire the fire operation is activated.
Alternative landing for Set to which alternative landing the car shall be
72
evacuation in the event of fire lead when the fire operation is activated.
Set the maximum ambient temperature (in ºC)
Maximum temperature in the
73 allowed in the machine room without interfering
machine room
with the lift operation.
Set the minimum ambient temperature (in ºC)
allowed in the machine room without interfering
with the lift operation.
Minimum temperature in the
74
machine room
If this temperature is exceeded, the lift will no
longer operate after the ongoing travel is
completed.
Set in which circumstances a competent person
for maintenance is required to take the lift back
to normal operation by means of a manual
reset of the installation.
If the lift shall comply with the EN 81-1/2 + A3

or the EN 81-20, the value to be set to this
-. No
parameter shall be different from NO.
Circumstances requiring a -. According to
75
manual reset European Standard
- No: this function does not apply
-. Any failure
- According to European Standard: this function
only applies in the event of serious failure, i.e.
final switch failure, travel maximum time
exceeded, pressure switch and brake micro-
switches.
- Any failure: this function applies to any failure
leading the lift to "permanent out of service"
V101 - 03/2017 156/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

state.
Control of doors in inspection Set whether the door opening and closing is -. No
76
mode controlled from the console in inspection mode. -. Yes
-. No
-. On MCB board
Set which element will carry out the reading of
77 Reading of load -. On REV board
load according to the lift type.
-. On MP greenvalve
board (hydraulic)
-. MP ecoGO
Determine which type of telephone the
78 Type of telephone -. Fonomac 3
controller will use to carry out emergency calls.
-. Non-MP
Maximum number of Set the number of travels per hour that the car
79
operations per hour can make.
-. SynDO
-. REVECO+car door
80 Operator model of access 1 Set the operator model of access 1.
interlocking
-. REVECO
-. SynDO
-. REVECO+car door
interlocking
-. REVECO
-. SynDO
-. REVECO+car door
interlocking
-. REVECO
It determines whether the ESM1 terminal,
Function of ESM1 terminal of -. No
83 located on the REV board, acts as an input (E-)
REV board -. Governor tripping
or as an output (S-) and its function.
for the input/output ESM1 of REV board.
If it is an input:
83.
Logic of ESM1 terminal of REV activates the function assigned at parameter -. Without 24V DC
84
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
If it is an input:
85.
Logic of ESM2 terminal of REV -. Without 24V DC
86 85.
board -. With 24V DC
If it is an output:
activated.

activated.
87 Function of ESM3 terminal of It determines whether the ESM3 terminal, -. No
V101 - 03/2017 157/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

REV board located on the REV board, acts as an input (E-) -. Governor tripping
If it is an input:
87.
88
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
If it is an input:
89.
90
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
It determines whether the ESA1 terminal,
Function of ESA1 terminal of
91 located on the REV board, acts as an input (E-) -. No function
REV board
for the input/output ESA1 of REV board.
If it is an input:
91.
Logic of ESA1 terminal of REV activates the function assigned at parameter -. Without 24V DC
92
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
REV board
Logic of ESA2 terminal of REV for the input/output ESA2 of REV board. -. Without 24V DC
94
If it is an input:
V101 - 03/2017 158/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


93.
93.
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
REV board
for the input/output ESA3 of REV board.
If it is an input:
95.
96
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
REV board
for the input/output ESA4 of REV board:
If it is an input:
97.
98
If it is an output:
activated.
activated.
-. No function
-. Key switch for door
It determines whether the EA1 terminal, locking
Function of EA1 terminal of
99 located on the CAR board, acts as an input -. Key switch for lift out
CAR board
(E-) or as an output (S-) and its function. of service
-. Key switch for
priority of car calls
for the input EA1 of CAR board.
Logic of EA1 terminal of CAR -. Without 24V DC
100 - With voltage of 24V DC at the input, it
99.
V101 - 03/2017 159/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


99.
It determines whether the EA2 terminal,
101 located on the CAR board, acts as an input (E-) -. No function
CAR board

102 activates the function assigned at parameter
101.
101.
CAR board

103.
103.
CAR board

105.
105.
It determines whether the SA3 terminal,
Function of SA3 terminal of
CAR board
for the input SA3 of CAR board.

Logic of SA3 terminal of CAR -. Without 24V DC
107.
107.
It determines whether the SA4 terminal,
Function of SA4 terminal of
CAR board
for the input SA4 of CAR board.

Logic of SA4 terminal of CAR -. Without 24V DC
109.
109.
It determines whether the E1 terminal, located
Function of E1 terminal of
111 on the DOC1 board, acts as an input (E-) or as -. No function
DOC1 board
an output (S-) and its function.
Logic of E1 terminal of DOC1 for the input E1 of DOC1 board. -. Without 24V DC
112
V101 - 03/2017 160/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


111.
111.
DOC1 board
for the input E2 of DOC1 board.

Logic of E2 terminal of DOC1 -. Without 24V DC
113.
113.
DOC1 board

115.
115.
DOC1 board

117.
117.
DOC1 board

119.
119.
DOC2 board

121.
121.
DOC2 board
124 Logic of E2 terminal of DOC2 Set the activation logic of the function defined -. Without 24V DC
V101 - 03/2017 161/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

board for the input E2 of DOC2 board. -. With 24V DC

123.
123.
DOC2 board

125.
125.
DOC2 board

127.
127.
DOC2 board

129.
129.
DOC3 board

131.
131.
DOC3 board

133.
133.
135 Function of E3 terminal of It determines whether the E3 terminal, located -. No function
V101 - 03/2017 162/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

DOC3 board on the DOC3 board, acts as an input (E-) or as

Logic of E3 terminal of DOC3 activates the function assigned at parameter -. Without 24V DC
136
135.
DOC3 board

137.
137.
DOC3 board

139.
139.
-. MP 7-Segment-LCD
-. MP TFT
141 Type of display in car Set the type of display of the COP.
-. Non-MP,
communication via CAN
-. Deactivated
-. Voice synthesizer
-. Voice synthesizer +
Operation mode for car audio Select the operation mode for the car audio
142 analogue telephone
module (TEL) module
-. Voice synthesizer +
built-in digital
telephone
-. Never
-. Always
143 Background music Set when the background music is playing.
-. Only during the
service
Time during which the alarm pushbutton shall
be pressed until an alarm call is generated.
Period for the activation of the
144
alarm pushbutton
1 to 9: these are the seconds for pressing the
button until the call is generated.
Function associated to available the inputs and
outputs on the TEL board:
-. None
Function of the configurable 0: None -. Pictograms of the
145 inputs and outputs located on 1: Pictograms of the COP COP
the TEL board 2: Inputs and outputs configured from SIGMA -. SIGMA
platform. The inputs are monitored from inputs/outputs
sigma4lifts web and the outputs are set to a
value.
Determine the use of the terminal XTLBUC for
auxiliary audio
Function of the terminal -. None
146 XTLBUC located on the TEL -. Induction loop
0: None
board -. Auxiliary speaker
1: Induction loop
2: Auxiliary speaker
V101 - 03/2017 163/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Determine the volume of the main speaker in a

telecomm (0 to 99):
General volume of the main
147
speaker
0: mute
01 to 99: level of audio volume
Determine the volume of the main speaker in a
General volume of the telecomm (0 to 99):
148
auxiliary speaker 0: mute
Determine the volume of the main speaker
during the playing of voice messages (0 to 99):
General volume of the
149
synthesizer main speaker 0: mute

Determine the volume of the auxiliary speaker
during the playing of voice messages (0 to 99):
150
synthesizer auxiliary speaker
0: mute
Determine the volume of the main speaker
General volume of the during the audio of background music (0 to
151 background music main 99):
speaker 0: mute
Determine the volume of the auxiliary speaker
during the audio of background music (0 to
99):
152 background music auxiliary
speaker
0: mute
The operation without batteries is always
deactivated in normal and inspection modes
due to the European standard requirements,
but it is activated in any other mode.
Enabling of the operation If the value set to this parameter is 1, the

-. No
153 without batteries in inspection operation without batteries is also activated in
-. Yes
mode inspection mode.
- 0 = No: operation without batteries in

inspection mode non activated
- 1 = Yes: operation without batteries in
inspection mode activated
Function U36: French standard for the use of
154 Function U36
lifts in the event of fire.
-. No
It determines the level of energy savings for -. Level 0
155 Level of STAND BY
the installation. -. Level 1
-. Level 2
It determines how long the leds will be switched
STAND BY Level 0 for LED
156 on from the moment the controller starts
timer
operating in normal mode.
It determines, in minutes, how long the car
STAND BY Level 0 for car display will remain switched on while the lift is
157
display timer parked at floor, waiting for a new service
command.
Set the length, in mm, of the landing door
unlocking zone where the car can move with
158 Length of unlocking zone
doors open. This value shall be less that the
length of magnet (ZS) for safety zone.
Set where the overspeed governor is located in
-. No
Location of the overspeed the installation: its location determines from
159 -. Car
governor which electronic board (MCB or REV) the
-. Shaft
tripping will be commanded.
-. No
Set the function assigned to the KCAM relay of
160 Function of the KCAM relay -. Cam activation
the REV board.
-. Governor activation
161 Pre-starting Enable the speed control of the inverter before -. No
V101 - 03/2017 164/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

the lift doors are full closed. This function -. Yes

reduces the lift starting time.
It controls the volume for all the sound -. Mute
Volume for sound elements in elements which are not related to an -. Low
162
night mode emergency event: buttons, gong, synthesizer, -. Medium
piped music... -. High
Microphone volume when Set the car microphone volume when used for
163
used as a phone phone calls.
Microphone volume when Set the car microphone volume when used for
164
used as an intercom intercom
Brightness of built-in State in % the brightness of car pictograms
165
pictograms according to the Standard EN 81-28.
Synthesizer - messages Enable the playing of synthesizer messages -. Enabled
166
related to the floor when arriving at the destination floor. -. Disabled
Enable the playing of synthesizer messages
Synthesizer - messages -. Enabled
167 informing about the opening or closing of the
related to the doors -. Disabled
lift doors.
Synthesizer - messages Enable the playing of synthesizer messages -. Enabled
168
related to the motion direction informing about the lift motion direction. -. Disabled
Synthesizer - special Enable the playing of synthesizer special -. Enabled
169
messages messages. -. Disabled
Synthesizer - messages Enable the playing of synthesizer messages
-. Enabled
170 played in car during an alarm devoted to the users trapped into the car,
-. Disabled
call during an alarm call.
Enable the playing of synthesizer messages
Synthesizer - messages
devoted to the receiver of the alarm call. This -. Enabled
171 played to the receiver during
message will not be payed via the car -. Disabled
an alarm call
loudspeaker.
Set the microphone volume of the AUDIO 1
172 AUDIO 1 - microphone volume
module.
AUDIO 1 - loudspeaker Set the loudspeaker volume of the AUDIO 1
173
volume module.
-. Disabled
-. Intercom
Set the operation mode of the AUDIO 1 -. Telephone +
174 AUDIO 1 - Operation mode
module. intercom
-. Intercom for
evacuation floor
module.
176
volume module.
-. Disabled
-. Intercom
module. intercom
-. Intercom for
evacuation floor
module.
179
volume module.
-. Disabled
-. Intercom
module. intercom
-. Intercom for
evacuation floor
module.
182
volume module.
-. Disabled
-. Intercom
module. intercom
-. Intercom for
evacuation floor
184 Alarm filtering according to EN Activate or deactivate the alarm filtering. -. Deactivated
V101 - 03/2017 165/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

81-28 -. Activated
Determine the controller behaviour after a
default related to the leveller is detected. -. 0: Inhibition of
Set to value 0: if the error is related to signals operations with door
of a specific floor, the operations with door open at the specific
Controller behaviour after a open are inhibited at this floor only. floor
185
leveller default Set to value 1: if the error is related to any -. 1: Inhibition of
floor signal, the operations with door open are operations with door
inhibited at all the floors. open
Set to value 2: in the same situation, the lift is -. 2: Lift out of service
shift to Out of service due to a breakdown.
Key switch for out of service Key switch on the COP for shifting the lift out of -. No
186
in car service. -. Yes
When the key switch on the COP is activated,
Key switch for priority of car all the landing and car calls recorded are -. No
187
calls removed and, from this moment only the new -. Yes
car calls will be permitted.
Set in mm the height between the car floor -
188 Car height measured from inside the car- up to the roof -
measured outside the car.
Set the door position of doors when the car is
parked at this floor. -. Default
100125 Position of doors in idle state -. Closed
0: The default value is the value set to -. Open
parameter 6.
-. No
-. Access available
from the COP
It allows you to restrict the access to this floor
-. Access available
1002 Restricted floor by means of an access code or in a permanent
from the LOP
way.
-. Enabled via special
call
-. Yes
Set the access code to make calls to this floor
1003 Code for car calls
from the car.
Symbol identifying this floor within the display
1004 Floor identification
sequence.
-. 0º
-. 90º
-. 0º - 90º
1005 Available accesses Assign the available accesses for this floor. -. 180º
-. 0º - 180º
-. 90º - 180º
-. 0º - 90º - 180º
Modify the car stopping position for adjusting it
1006 Car stopping accuracy
to the floor level.
Set, in mm, the point within the travel where
1007 Braking distance the car starts the process of braking and
stopping at floor level.
11.3 INVERTER unit
-. 10HP/400V AC
Identify the inverter model in terms of voltage -. 10HP/220V AC
32001 Type of inverter
and power -. 15HP/400V AC
-. 20HP/400V AC
Value consisting of 4 digits:
- Digit 1 (ones): Autoreset. Set the maximum no.
of errors permitted for 3 minutes allowing an
32002 Errors and check automatic reset of the device. When this number
is exceeded, the device requires a manual reset
via console or PC.
The default value of this digit is 5. If it is set to 0,
25
Parameters 1001 to 1007 are all associated to the same floor and, thus, they will be repeated for every floor existing in the installation.
V101 - 03/2017 166/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

the device will never be out of service.
- Digit 2 (tens): with synchronous machines, this

parameter value is 3 and shall not be modified.
- Digit 3 (hundreds): check of contactors in idle

state:
 0: activated
 1: deactivated
The default value of this digit is 0 (activated).

However, with the twofold aim of being able to
carry out tests and avoiding to get the lift out of
order (only in a temporary way), it can be set to
1.
- Digit 4 (thousands: check of current sensors.
 0: activated
 1: deactivated
The default value of this digit is 0. Before every

starting, the inverter carries out a check of
current sensors, based on the offset value
obtained. Except for exceptional situations
(execution of some tests recommended by the
aftersales service), this parameter shall never be
set to 1 (deactivated).
A wrong reading of the current may lead to an

excess of voltage injected into the synchronous
motor. This could cause an irreversible damage of
the permanent magnets and the machine would
be unserviceable.
Thus, unless otherwise indicated by the MP

aftersales service, it is recommended to keep this
digit value to 0.
-. Deactivated
-. Interface of
Set whether the data monitoring via CAN is current/speed/voltage
32004 Monitoring via CAN
activated: -. High-resolution
interface
-. Reserved
Determine whether the machine run direction
Setting of the machine run -. Not reversed
32005 which is set on the direction command shall be
direction -. Reversed
reversed or not.
This value consists of 2 digits. Set the data block
displayed on the Vía Serie console:
Digit of ones: for the data displaying of sinusoidal

Selection of data block and absolute encoder:
32006 displayed on the Vía Serie  1: visible
console  0: non-visible
Digit of tens: for the data displaying of current:

 1: visible
 0: non-visible
Set, in m/s, the speed of the car motion in
32256 Speed of inspection mode
inspection operation mode (maintenance).
There are 2 ways for detecting anomalies in
speed measuring. According to this parameter
value, the detection will be carried out in one way
or another:
32259 Speed monitoring
a) Speed monitoring = 0: the maximum speed
allowed is 118% of the rated speed.
b) Speed monitoring > 0: percentage, up to 18%,
V101 - 03/2017 167/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

of maximum permissible deviation with regard to

the commanded speed.
When the commanded speed is greater than the

set slow speed and the inverter detects 0 speed,
the failure 06.18.06 (motor blocked) appears.
When the inverter detects that the actual speed is

greater than the commanded speed, by the
indicated percentage, the failure 06.18.17
(overspeed) appears.
When the inverter detects that the actual speed is

lower than the commanded one, by the indicated
percentage, the failure 06.18.20 (motion in the
opposite direction) appears.
Set, in m/s, the speed of the car motion when
Motion speed with assembly
32260 using the assembly remote control
remote control
(maintenance).
Set, in m/s, the fast speed for operations of
32261 Special fast speed position reset and learning procedure of the
positioning system (autolearning).
Set, in m/s, the slow speed for operations of
32262 Special slow speed position reset and learning procedure of the
positioning system (autolearning).
Set, in m/s, the rated speed of car motion during
32512 Rated speed of bench 1
a journey.
Set, in m/s, the approach speed to the
32513 Approach speed of bench 1
destination floor.
Determine, in seconds, how long will be the
32514 Acceleration time of bench 1
acceleration time to adjust the comfort.
Set the profile of the speed curve until the rated
speed is reached:
- If the value is greater than 1, the greater it is,

Profile of the acceleration smoother is the curve starting and less smooth is
32515
curve the end.
- If the value is lower than 1, the lower it is,

sharper is the curve starting and smoother is the
end.
32516 Deceleration time of bench 1
deceleration time to adjust the comfort.
Set the profile of the speed curve until the
approach speed is reached:

Profile of the deceleration smoother is the curve starting and less smooth is
32517
curve the end.

end.
Determine, in mm, the distance required by the
32518 Braking distance of bench 1 controller to stop the car in a comfortable way for
the passenger.
Set, in m/s, the rated speed of car motion during
32768 Rated speed of bench 2
a journey.
Set, in m/s, the approach speed to the
32769 Approach speed of bench 2
destination floor.
32770 Acceleration time of bench 2
acceleration time to adjust the comfort.
Set the profile of the speed curve until the rated
speed is reached:
Profile of the acceleration
32771 - If the value is greater than 1, the greater it is,
curve
smoother is the curve starting and less smooth is
the end.
V101 - 03/2017 168/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


end.
32772 Deceleration time of bench 2
deceleration time to adjust the comfort.
Set the profile of the speed curve until the
approach speed is reached:

Profile of the deceleration smoother is the curve starting and less smooth is
32773
curve 2 the end.

end.
Determine, in mm, the distance required by the
32774 Braking distance of bench 2 controller to stop the car in a comfortable way for
the passenger.
Activate/deactivate the linear ramp of speed at
starting.
It is recommended to be used in installations

-. Disabled
33024 Linear starting where the car tends to get stuck at starting. It is
-. Enabled
especially recommended in installations with
backpack frame or in those where, even with
arcade frame, the clearance on the guide rails is
not enough.
Set, in m/s, the final speed of the linear ramp of
33025 Linear starting. Speed
speed at linear starting.
Determine, in seconds, how long will be the linear
33026 Linear starting. Time
starting.
33280 Type of S-curve Determine the type of starting S-curve -. Sinusoidal
33285 Time of stopping curve
stopping curve.
Only valid for asynchronous motor in
voltage/frequency mode. Set, in %, the
33286 Levelling
adjustment of the commanded frequency with
regard to the load.
From a standpoint of the inverter, "short floor"
means that the car does not reach the rated
speed during a service. This may occur because:
• the distance from one floor to another is very

short, or
• the lift working at 1.6 m/s or at 1.0 m/s have

large stretch of acceleration: this is the reason
why during a service between consecutive floors
the rated speed is not met. This is the most
common case.
When a short floor is to be configured, the main

goal is that the car is not in motion at slow speed
Adjustment of short floors:
33536 for too long in order to avoid the service takes
extension time
longer than necessary.
For short floor adjustment, we have this

parameter and the next one.
When the inverter receives the signal of approach

speed, it makes the following:
• It continues a "little further" with the

acceleration ramp, i.e., with the speed increase.
This "little further" is determined by the
parameter of speed increase percentage. The
factory value is set to 50%. The greater it is, the
longer it will increase the speed.
V101 - 03/2017 169/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

• When the acceleration ramp is completed, the

inverter can keep the reached speed for a period
time calculated on the basis of the value set to
the time extension parameter.
From a standpoint of the inverter, "short floor"
means that the car does not reach the rated
speed during a service. This may occur because:
• the distance from one floor to another is very

short, or
• the lift working at 1.6 m/s or at 1.0 m/s have

large stretch of acceleration: this is the reason
why during a service between consecutive floors
the rated speed is not met. This is the most
common case.
When a short floor is to be configured, the main

goal is that the car is not in motion at slow speed
for too long in order to avoid the service takes
Adjustment of short floors: longer than necessary.
33537 increase percentage for
speed commanded For short floor adjustment, we have this
parameter and the previous one.
When the inverter receives the signal of approach

speed, it makes the following:
• It continues a "little further" with the

acceleration ramp, i.e., with the speed increase.
This "little further" is determined by the
parameter of speed increase percentage. The
factory value is set to 50%. The greater it is, the
longer it will increase the speed.
• When the acceleration ramp is completed, the

inverter can keep the reached speed for a period
time calculated on the basis of the value set to
the time extension parameter.
Set, in seconds, the time elapsed between the
33792 Delay in brake activation brake release command and the motor starts
rotating.
Delay in brake deactivation Set, in seconds, the time for transition from the
33793
before stopping speed control to the position control.
Set, in seconds, the time elapsed between the
Delay in brake deactivation
33794 brake deactivation and the supply cut to the
after stopping
motor when stopping.
Set, in seconds, the time it takes the contactors
to get activated from the car motion command
when starting.
Time it takes the contactors
33795 to get activated from the This parameter value depends on the contactor
motion command type used. Usually, the value shall not be
modified.
Its factory value is 0,25s.

Set, in m/s, the speed of transition when shifting
from speed control to position control.
33796 Speed of transition
Usually, the value shall not be modified.
its factory value is 0,0005 m/s.

Set, in digital units, the current value (close to 0)
from which the inverter stops injecting voltage to
Current value to deactivate the motor.
33797
the IGBT module
It is recommended to keep this parameter value
unchanged.
Maximum time permitted for Set, in seconds, the maximum time permitted for
33798
the current drop the drop of current.
V101 - 03/2017 170/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

It is recommended to keep this parameter value

unchanged.
Set, in seconds, the maximum extra time for the
Extra time to get the residual current to be equal to zero.
33799 residual current equal to
zero It is recommended to keep this parameter value
unchanged.
-. Deactivated
-. Activated, with
microswitches
Reading of the brake
33800 Determine the logic of brake microswitches. normally open (NO)
microswitches
-. Activated, with
microswitches
normally closed (NC)
The appropriate value for this parameter depends
on the machine profile.
The gearless machine brakes have a small

clearance. This is the reason why when the
supply to the motor is sharply cut at the end of
the stopping process and the brakes are already
applied, a snapping noise can be heard due to the
load effect. This noise occurs when the load
torque is transferred to the brakes. Depending on
the load and on the car position in the shaft, the
adaptation of the rotor to the clearance of the
brakes can be more or less sharp.
This effect can be eliminated by gradually

Time for the current drop
33801 removing the motor torque. This way, the rotor
after the brake is applied
adaptation will be smoother and the noise can
even disappear.
If the profile associated to the machine of this

installation is not available, this parameter value
can be adjusted, starting from the factory value,
carrying out arrivals at the top floor, with empty
car, and decreasing this time 0.10 s by 0.10 s,
until this shake and/or this noise is not felt
anymore. 0.20 s shall be added to the resulting
value.
This parameter value shall not be set high too

much, as the total stopping time would be
excessively increased.
Determine the maximum period during which the
inverter will keep the commanded 0 speed. When
this time is elapsed, the inverter understands
33802 Maximum time at zero speed there is an anomaly and it carries out a stopping
process.
The factory value is 20s.

-. 512
Determine the number of pulses per encoder -. 1024
34304 Number of pulses per turn
turn. -. 2048
-. 4096
Define the encoder used.
- Digit 1 (ones) = 1: Sinusoidal encoder
- Digit (tens) = 2: Absolute encoder Endat

34305 Encoder setting protocol
This value is factory fixed. At this moment, any

other value than the mentioned is not allowed, as
these encoders are the only ones used.
34560 Type of motor State the type of motor. -. Synchronous
34563 Number of motor poles State the number of motor poles.
Set, in ohms, the machine resistance.
34564 Resistance
V101 - 03/2017 171/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

This parameter cannot be manually modified. It

just will be automatically modified as the result of
an autotuning procedure or when stating the
profile of a certain motor model.
Set, in milliseconds, the time constant of the
machine.
Time constant of the
34565 This parameter cannot be manually modified. It
machine
Set, in mH, the machine inductance.
This parameter cannot be manually modified. It

34566 Inductance
Set, in A, the rated current of the machine as it
34567 Rated current of the motor
appears on the nameplate.
Diameter of the machine
34569 Set, in mm, the diameter of the machine pulley.
pulley
Suspension of the -. Suspension 1:1
34570 Set the suspension type of the installation.
installation -. Suspension 2:1
Enter the code corresponding to the motor model
in order to state the machine profile (refer to the
table of machine models).
34572 Model of motor
This parameter value does not remain after the
required data are stocked into the parameters
which are associated to the machine profile.
PI control of magnetizing current. Stated in V/A.
The proportional constant of magnetizing current

and the integral time form the PI control of
magnetizing current.
For synchronous machines, as they are provided

Proportional constant of with permanent magnets, no energy is invested
34819
magnetizing current control in creating a magnetic field.
Thus, the target value for this control is to keep

this current to zero.
The values of these parameters can be set via the

autotuning procedure or when stating the
machine profile.
Integral time, in milliseconds, of PI magnetizing
current control.
Integral time of magnetizing

34820 Refer to the description of previous parameter.
current control
Do not modify unless you are told to do so by the
Aftersales staff. A special authorisation is
required to carry out the modification.
PI control of torque current. Stated in V/A.
The proportional constant of torque current and

the integral time form the PI control of torque
current.
In the event of synchronous machines, as they

Proportional constant of
34821 are provided with permanent magnets, no energy
torque current control
is invested in creating the required torque. This is
the reason for its performance.
The values of these parameters can be set via the

autotuning procedure or when stating the
machine profile.
V101 - 03/2017 172/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


Integral time, in milliseconds, of PI torque current
control.
Integral time of torque Refer to the description of previous parameter.

34822
current control
Cut off frequency of current
34825 Set, in Hz, the low-pass filter frequency.
filter
The current offset is calculated after every
starting. This parameter determines whether the
-. After activating
calculation is made before or after activating
contactors
34826 Current offset calculation contactors.
-. Before activating
contactors
Aftersales staff.
Speed control. Stated in A/rd.s-1.
The speed control consists of a PI control of the

commanded speed over the measured speed.
In addition, the inverter distinguishes among the

different zones forming a complete service. This
is the reason why there are more than one
proportional constants and integration times,
each one corresponding to a specific journey
phase.
These parameters are part of the machine profile.

Nevertheless, sometimes the particular features
Proportional constant of
35072 of the installation require them to be modified,
starting
e.g. in refurbishment.
The proportional constants tell the inverter how

to proceed in the event of a speed particular
deviation measured over the commanded speed.
The integration times state how long it will take
the inverter to stabilise the speed.
For instance, in an installation with guide rail
troubles, it is recommended to decrease the
proportional constants and/or slightly increase
the integration times. On a high-performance
installation, the proportional constants can be
increased and/or the integration times can be
slightly decreased.
PI proportional constant of
35073
rated speed Refer to the description of "Proportional constant
of starting".
PI integral time of rated
35074
speed Refer to the description of "Proportional constant
of starting".
PI proportional constant of
35075
approach speed Refer to the description of "Proportional constant
of starting".
Speed control. Stated in seconds.
PI integral time of approach
35076
of starting".
Speed control. Stated in seconds.
PI integral time of stopping
35077
of starting".
V101 - 03/2017 173/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

The filter over the measured speed of the inverter

-. Filter deactivated
consists of the average calculation coming out
-. Average of 2
from a number of speed measures.
measures
-. Average of 4
This parameter states the number of measures to
measures
Filter of speed measured in get the average speed.
35079 -. Average of 8
motor
measures
The maximum value of this parameter is 5 (32
-. Average of 16
measures for getting the average).
measures
-. Average of 32
measures
Aftersales staff.
Stated in seconds.
This parameter states for how long the speed is

Analysis time for establishing analysed, during the rated speed period, for
35080
the rated speed stability determining whether it is stable or not.

Aftersales staff.
Stated in seconds.
This parameter states for how long the speed is

Analysis time for establishing analysed, during the approach speed period, for
35081
the approach speed stability determining whether it is stable or not.

Aftersales staff.
Internal parameter. For gearless machines, the
value shall be 10000.
Setting for speed control and
35082
measure
Aftersales staff.
Determine when the integral term of the speed
control shall intervene.
-. Integral term
- 0: only when the speed is stable activated only when
Intervention of the integral
35083 - 1: always the speed is stable
term of speed control
-. Integral term
The factory value is 1 (always) and it is always activated
recommended not to modify unless you are told
to do so by the Aftersales staff.
Determine whether the position control is
activated or not and, if yes, how it shall take
action.
The control position goal is to minimize the rotor

motion at the brake activation and deactivation.
Thus, the position control takes action at starting
and stopping. In every situation, it can work in
two different modes: -. Deactivated. Most
undesirable with
(a) by means of forcing the rotor to maintain the gearless machines
position it had before its opening. -. Activated, mode
(a) at starting and
(b) by means of preventing the rotor motion, but stopping
35328 Position control mode
not forcing it to return to its initial position (i.e. -. Activated, mode
before the brake opening). (b) at starting and
mode (a) at stopping
The mode of position control at stopping is the -. Activated, mode
mode (a) in most cases. Nevertheless, the control (b) at starting and
position at starting can be (a) or (b), according to stopping
the installation features, as per its performance
and payload:
- For installations with high performance and low

payload, the mode (a) is recommended
- For installations with low performance and or

high payload, the mode (b) is recommended
V101 - 03/2017 174/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

More generally, the value 1 is recommended for

high-performance installations and the value 2 for
low performance installations.
The greater is the value, the quicker the
proportional constant takes action at starting.
Proportional constant at
35329
starting If the value is too low, a rollback can occur. If it
is too high, vibrations/noise can be generated at
starting.
Proportional constant of The greater is the value, the quicker the
35330
stopping proportional constant takes action at stopping.
Set, in kHz, the switching frequency of the
35584 Switching frequency
inverter.
Set the modulation type of the inverter. At this
35585 Modulation type moment, the triangular mode (0) is the only one -. PWM Triangular
admitted.
Value in microseconds.
35586 Downtimes
Do not modify this value unless you are told to do
so by the Aftersales staff.
Value in microseconds.
35587 Minimum width of pulse
Set the adjustment of the current measure of
phase U.
Adjustment of the current This value is set during the process of adjustment
35840
measure phase U and check which is carried out at the factory.

phase V.
35841
measure phase V and check which is carried out at the factory.

phase W.
35842
measure phase W and check which is carried out at the factory.

Set the gain of the bus voltage measured.
This value is set during the process of adjustment

35843 Gain of bus voltage and check which is carried out at the factory.

Set the adjustment of the earth fault measure of
phase W.

35844 Gain of earth fault voltage
and check which is carried out at the factory.

Set the 0 of channel A.
35845 Zero of channel A This value is set during the process of adjustment
and check which is carried out at the factory.
V101 - 03/2017 175/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


Set the 0 of channel B.

35846 Zero of channel B and check which is carried out at the factory.

Set the amplitude of the senoidal encoder.

35847 Amplitude adjustment and check which is carried out at the factory.

This parameter value comes from the autotuning.
If the autotuning has been run in a normal way,
Coupling offset of the
35848 this value shall be 0.
absolute encoder
Never modify this parameter value.
If the autotuning has been run in a normal way,
Coupling offset of the
35849 this value shall be 0.
senoidal encoder
It corresponds to the maximum value from the
Peak value of the senoidal
35850 readings of the senoidal encoder.
encoder
The value consists of 3 digits.
It characterises the senoidal encoder used:
- Digit 1 (ones): its value comes from the

autotuning. It has to do with the rotating
direction of the senoidal encoder: 1 = direction
reversed; 0 = direction not reversed.
- Digit 2 (tens): its value comes from the

autotuning. It has to do with the direction of the
Features of the senoidal
35851 electrical angle. 1 = direction reversed; 0 =
encoder
direction not reversed.
- Digit 3 (hundreds): it determines the self-

adjustment activation of the senoidal encoder.
This value shall be 1.
In most cases, the value of this parameter shall

be 100.

Set, in m/s, the car speed in rescue mode.
36097 Speed in rescue mode
This parameter depends on the machine profile.
Do not modify its value.
Set, in seconds, the acceleration time in rescue
mode.
36099 Acceleration time
Set, in m/s, the final speed of the initial ramp of
speed in rescue mode.
36100 Starting speed
36101 Time for the starting Determine, in seconds, how long will be the initial
V101 - 03/2017 176/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

acceleration ramp in rescue mode.

In order to protect and guarantee the rescue
completion, the maximum current of output to
motor is limited to twice the quantity set to this
36102 Rated current parameter.

Limit the maximum speed during a rescue
process. If the speed measured during this
process is greater than this parameter value, the
overspeed failure (06.18.17) is generated.
Maximum speed in rescue by
36103 When the inverter short-circuits the motor
means of imbalance load
phases, the speed reached by the car depends on
the machine, the installation performance and the
proper counterbalancing. To be EN 81-20
compliant, this value shall be set to a maximum
of 0.30 m/s.
Allow the machine autotuning run. To run it, set
the value 09999 to this parameter. This process
applies only to synchronous motors. Before
executing it, make sure that the parameter
"machine rated current" is the right one for the
machine which shall be without load (i.e., no
cable on its pulley, the car and counterweight
suspended).
The autotuning run consists of the following steps

with the MP ecoGO tools APP for PC of the Vía
Serie console:
* STEP 1: Shift the controller to the inspection

mode or the MES mode.
* STEP 2: Check that the value set to the

parameter "machine rated current" is like the one
shown on the nameplate.
IMPORTANT REMARK: A wrong value set to this

parameter may cause a damage to the machine.
If the value is unknown or inaccessible, do not
run the autotuning.
36608 Autotuning
* STEP 3: Autotuning activation; set this
parameter to 09999.
* STEP 4: Exit the setting mode.
* STEP 5: The console will display, alternately

and flashing, StArt and tunin.
* STEP 6: Keep on pushing the Up/Down button

in MES mode or on the assembly remote control.
Throughout the process, the message tunXX,
where XX is the percentage of process
completion, will be displaying.
* STEP 7: If the process is completed without

errors, the console will display SAVIN flashing.
At this moment, the parameter values obtained

from the autotuning process are being recorded.
* STEP 8: At the end, the console will display,

alternately and flashing: tunin and end.
V101 - 03/2017 177/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

IMPORTANT: THIS IS THE MOMENT, NEVER

BEFORE, WHEN YOU CAN STOP PRESSING THE
UP/DOWN BUTTON AS THE PROCESS HAS BEEN
COMPLETED.
Activate the process of adjustment of current
sensors.
During this process, the machine brake is not

released, so that there is NO NEED to suspend
the car and the counterweight.
It is recommended to run this process if

vibrations are appreciated at rated speed or at
low speed.
The adjustment process of sensors consists of the

following steps with the MP ecoGO tools APP for
PC of the Vía Serie console:
* STEP 1: Shift the controller to the inspection
mode or the MES mode.
* STEP 2: Activate the adjustment of current

sensors by setting this parameter to value 00001.
* STEP 3: Exit the setting mode.

Adjustment of current -. Deactivated
36609 * STEP 4: The console will display, alternately
sensors -. Activated
and flashing, StArt and ADJin.
* STEP 5: Keep on pushing the Up/Down button

on the command panel or the assembly remote
control. Throughout the process, the message
ADJ.XX, where XX state the different ongoing
phases.
* STEP 6: The process will take 30 to 45 seconds

during which the machine shall remain motionless
and the brake deactivated.
* STEP 7: At the end, the console will display,

alternately and flashing: ADJin and end.
IMPORTANT: THIS IS THE MOMENT, NEVER

BEFORE, WHEN YOU CAN STOP PRESSING THE
UP/DOWN BUTTON AS THE PROCESS HAS BEEN
COMPLETED.
* STEP 6: If the process is completed without

errors, the console will display SAVIN flashing.
Set, in Hz, the specific frequency of switching for
the sensor adjustment and the autotuning
processes.
If the autotuning run does not exceed 0%, there

may be two causes:
Frequency of switching for
36610 the sensor adjustment and
a) Rated current of the machine too low with
the autotuning
regard to the input voltage.
b) Switching frequency.
It is recommended to decrease the rated current

and/or the switching frequency.
Determine for how long the signal of brake
microswitches will be analysed.
Sampling time for brake
36865 Through the reading of brake microswitches, the
microswitches
inverter determines the state of the disks.
There are two possible failures associated to
V101 - 03/2017 178/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

these readings:
1) The brakes are not anymore in the desired

state.
2) There are noise troubles interfering in these

reading microswitches.
Well, this is the time it takes to analyse whether

there are noise troubles or not.
It is recommended to keep the factory value

(2.00 s).
Internal parameters for setting the current filter.
With value 0, the inverter itself will assign the

proper value for this constant of phase
37120 Damping factor adjustment. Otherwise, the inverter will assume
the value set.

Internal parameters for setting the current filter.
With value 0, the inverter itself will assign the

proper value for this constant of phase
Constant of phase
37121 adjustment. Otherwise, the inverter will assume
adjustment
the value set.

Sign of the value for
Sign of the parameter value for adjusting the -. Negative
37376 adjusting the levelling
levelling position. -. Positive
position
Adjustment of the levelling position.
Make a travel upwards and another one

Value for adjusting the downwards to the same intermediate floor of the
37377
levelling position travel. The difference, in tenths of a millimetre,
resulting between the car stopping level in
upwards and the car stopping level in downwards
will be the value to be set to this parameter.
V101 - 03/2017 179/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

11.4 LINK board
1st alarm telephone number for calls

40001 Alarm 1 telephone number
generated from the COP.
2nd alarm telephone number for calls
3rd alarm telephone number for calls
Alarm telephone number for calls
Alarm telephone number for generated from the car roof button or the
40004
technician pit button or AUDIO boards, only
accessible for the technician.
Telephone number for maintenance calls
Telephone number for which are automatically generated by the
40005
maintenance LINK board to report any operation fault in
the installation.
ID identifier in protocols such Installation identifier for protocols such as
40006
as CPC, P100 and CPMAC CPC, P100 and CPMAC.
By means of a text string associating the
description for this LINK board registered
40007 LINK board identification
within sigma4lifts, the maintenance
company sets the identification name.
40008 Software version Id of the present software version
Hardware identification of the board This
40009 IMEI value is taken from the GSM/GPRS
module.
40010 ICCID Series number of the SIM card.
40011 IMSI Phone number of the IMSI card.
Simplified report about the general state
of the LINK board. It is periodically sent,
40012 Hardware state
according the value set to parameter
41029.
Year/month/Day - Hour/Minute/Second -
Date and time (RTC
40013 synchronised with the net or the SIMA
synchronised with the net)
server. (Real Time Clock)
User name in the net of the User name in the net of the telecom
40014
telecom company company for the registration.
Password in the net of the telecom
40015 Password
company for the registration.
IP address of the IP address assigned to the communication
40016
communication device device by the network operator.
IP address of the DNS server for
40017 IP address of the DNS server
addresses.
IP addresses with
IP addresses with permissions to access
40018 permissions to access this
this LINK board in order to receive data.
LINK board. Firewall
Mask applied to the IP addresses with
40019 Firewall mask
access permission for receiving data.
IP address of SIGMA main
40020 IP address of SIGMA main server.
server
IP address of the backup server for data
IP address of SIGMA reception. The data are sent to this server
40021
secondary server in the event there is a connection failure
with the main server.
UDP port of SIGMA server to which the
40022 UDP port of SIGMA server
data messages are sent.
IP server address of IP dynamic
40023 IP of the IPs server
addresses.
UDP port of the IP server to which the
40024 UDP port of the IP server
requests of final IP address are sent.
File directory path in SIGMA
40025 File root directory in SIGMA server.
FTP server
40026 Serial number of LINK board Serial number of LINK board.
40027 PIN code of SIM card PIN safety code of SIM card.
Access safety code for setting the board
40028 Programming access code
parameters.
V101 - 03/2017 180/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

1st telephone number to which the LINK

White list 1 telephone board can send voice calls, even though
40029
number for voice calls calls are forbidden to the group it belongs
to.
2nd telephone number to which the LINK
40030
to.
3rd telephone number to which the LINK
40031
to.
4th telephone number to which the LINK
40032
to.
5th telephone number to which the LINK
40033
to.
1st telephone number with which the LINK
White list 1 telephone
board can exchange CSD data, even
40034 number for data
though calls are forbidden to the group it
communication
belongs to.
2nd telephone number with which the
LINK board can exchange CSD data, even
communication
belongs to.
3rd telephone number with which the LINK
board can exchange CSD data, even
communication
belongs to.
Telephone number for Telephone number to which the reported
40037
receiving SMS events via SMS are sent.
1st telephone number enabling the
1st telephone number for
40038 activation of the temporary context on the
temporary context mode
board.
2nd telephone number enabling the
2nd telephone number for
40039 activation of the temporary context on the
temporary context mode
board.
Telephone number for Telephone number for remote and
40040 activating the debugging temporary activation of the debugging
mode mode.
APN name of the service
40041 APN name of the network operator.
provider
Phone number to which periodic test calls
40042 Phone number for test calls are directed, as per EN 81-28
requirement.
ID for CPC, P100 and CPMAC protocols
associated to the phone 1 number. If no
40043 ID for alarm phone 1
value is set to this parameter, the general
ID is used.
ID is used.
ID is used.
ID for technician alarm associated to the technician alarm phone.
44046
phone If no value is set to this parameter, the
general ID is used.
associated to the maintenance phone. If
40047 ID for maintenance phone
no value is set to this parameter, the
general ID is used.
V101 - 03/2017 181/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


associated to the test phone. If no value is
40048 ID for test phone
set to this parameter, the general ID is
use
Set the periodicity for the device to carry
out a test call:
41001 Periodicity of the TEST call
0: Deactivated
1 a 9: Days up to next TEST call
Set the number of rings required to pick
up the phone and receive the call:
41002 Automatic reply
0: Deactivated
1 a 9: Rings up to picking up
-. None
Communication protocol via Set the alarm protocol via remote -. CPMAC
41003
tones communication. -. CPC
-. P100
Set the code for external line when there
is a telephone switchboard: after dialling
the first digit of the alarm telephone
Tone for external line when
number, the device inserts a pause of 3 -. No
41004 there is a telephone
seconds. This procedure turns the first -. Yes
switchboard
digit into the code for reaching an external
line. Any value from 0 to 9 can be set to
this code.
When this function is activated, the alarm
-. Not required
41005 Alarm call received call receiver shall confirm the reception of
-. Required
the alarm call by pressing "4".
When this function is activated, the test
-. Not required
41006 Test call received call receiver shall confirm the reception of
-. Required
the TEST call by pressing "4".
Activate the emission of a call progress -. Deactivated
41007 Sound identification
tone during the alarm calls. -. Activated
Set, in volts, the warning threshold for low
battery:
0: Deactivated
Warning threshold for low
41008 1: Threshold 1 (11.2 V)
battery
2: Threshold 2 (11.0 V)
...
9: Threshold 9 (10.0 V)
Set the maximum number of voice calls
per day:
41009 Limit of calls per day 0: Deactivated
1 to 255: No. of voice calls permitted per
day
Set the maximum number of data packets
per day:
41010 Limit of data packets per day 0: Deactivated
1 to 255: No. of data packets permitted
per day
Enable the filtering of voice calls to any
Use of white list for call -. Deactivated
41011 destination which is not included in the
filtering -. Activated
voice call white list.
Enable the activation of fastDialling
function. The code associated to the -. Deactivated
41012 fastDialling function
phone number included in the voice white -. Activated
list will be dialled.
Activate the call barring for any outgoing
General barring of outgoing -. Deactivated
41013 voice call to any destination, but the
calls -. Activated
incoming voice calls remain enabled.
Carrier of events via voice Enable the report of events via voice -. Deactivated
41014
messages messages. -. Activated
Carrier of events via UDP Enable the report of events via UDP data -. Deactivated
41015
protocol protocol. -. Activated
Carrier of events via TCP Enable the report of events via TCP -. Deactivated
41016
Carrier of events via FTP Enable the report of events via FTP data -. Deactivated
41017
Carrier of events via CSD Enable the report of events via CSD data -. Deactivated
41018
V101 - 03/2017 182/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

Carrier of events via DTMF Enable the report of events via DTMF data -. Deactivated
41019
-. Deactivated
41020 Carrier of events via SMS Enable the report of events via SMS.
-. Activated
-. No
It informs whether the lift is connected to
41021 sigma4lifts -. Yes
the sigma4lifts service
-. Automatic detection
It informs whether the SIM inserted into -. No
41022 SIM card supplied by MP
the device is supplied by MP -. Yes
-. Without context
-. Temporary context
Set the data context mode with any
41023 Context mode -. Temporary context with
network operator.
report
-. Permanent context
Set, in milliseconds, how long will be the
DTMF tones emitted by the device.
41024 Time for DTMF tones ON
0 to 255 ms.
Set, in milliseconds, how long will be the
pause between DTMF tones emitted by the
41025 Time for DTMF tones OFF device.
0 to 255 ms.
-. Automatic
-. FR
Determine the voice codec used in GSM -. EFR
41026 GSM codec
communications. -. HR
-. AMR-FR
-. AMR-HR
-. 0 dB
Set, in dB, the gain level applied to the -. 2 dB
41027 Gain level from PCM to GSM audio coming out from PCM port and going -. -2 dB
to the GSM network -. 5 dB
-. -5 dB
-. 0 dB
Set, in dB, the gain level applied to the -. 2 dB
41028 Gain level from GSM to PCM audio coming out from GSM network and -. -2 dB
going to the PCM network. -. 5 dB
-. -5 dB
Period, in minutes, for next report about
the device hardware state to be sent.
Periodicity of simplified
41029
report about hardware state
0: Deactivated
1 to 255 min
Set the remote identification protocol for
-. None
Protocol for remote the alarm call associated to the alarm
-. CPMAC
41035 communication of alarm phone 1. If no value is set to this
-. CPC
phone 1 parameter, the general remote ID for
-. P100
alarm calls is used (41003).
-. None
-. CPMAC
-. CPC
-. P100
-. None
-. CPMAC
-. CPC
-. P100
-. None
Protocol for remote the alarm call associated to the technician
-. CPMAC
41038 communication of technician alarm phone. If no value is set to this
-. CPC
alarm parameter, the general remote ID for
-. P100
-. None
Protocol for remote the alarm call associated to the
-. CPMAC
41039 communication of maintenance phone. If no value is set to
-. CPC
maintenance phone this parameter, the general remote ID for
-. P100
V101 - 03/2017 183/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

-. Generated by the
Choose the method for the synthesis of
41040 Generator of DTMF tones network
DTMF tones.
-. Locally generated
Gain applied to the PCM audio sampling
41041 DTMF detection - Gain
before entering into the DTMF detector.
Highest threshold applied to the circuit of
41042 DTMF detection - Threshold 1
DTMF tone detection.
Highest threshold applied to the circuit of
41043 DTMF detection - Threshold 2
DTMF tone detection.
-. Voice call
Channel for reporting the Choose the channel for reporting the
41044 -. SMS
periodic test results periodic test results.
-. Data - UDP
-. Voice call
Channel for reporting the low Choose the channel for reporting the low
41045 -. SMS
battery state battery state.
-. Data - UDP
State, in minutes, the maximum duration
Maximum duration for an for an alarm call generated by the user.
41046
alarm call When this time is over, the call will be
automatically ended.
State, in minutes, the maximum duration
Maximum duration for an for an incoming call directed to the lift.
41047
incoming call When this time is over, the call will be
automatically ended.
State the number of attempts permitted to
Number of attempts to every
41048 every alarm phone before shifting to the
alarm phone number
following phone number of the list.
State the information volume supplied to
41049 Information supplied online SIGMA servers during an online
monitoring session.
Information refresh rate State the time (in tenths of second)
41050 during an online remote between two online information packages
control session supplied to SIGMA servers.
Total number of TEL boards Total number of TEL boards connected to
41051
connected the same LINK board
Total number of AUDIO Total number of AUDIO boards connected
41052
boards connected to the same LINK board.
-. None
the alarm call associated to the test
Protocol for remote -. CPMAC
41053 phone. If no value is set to this
communication of test phone -. CPC
parameter, the general remote ID for
-. P100
V101 - 03/2017 184/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

12 FAILURES AND NON STARTING CAUSES

12.1 Failures of the ALIM board
This table shows all the error codes reported by the DLPSF led, which is associated to the ALIM board
TABLE OF ERRORS INFORMED BY THE DLPSF LED:
* FLASHING COMPLETE SEQUENCE OF DLPSF LED:
Quick flashing  LED OFF  no. of flashings corresponding to the tens  Led OFF  no. of flashings
corresponding to the ones
ERROR CODE
DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSES
NUMBER LED FLASHING
DEFAULT ON OUTPUT OF 24M:
Incoherence between signals of KSTB2,
L24MAF and FF1
INTERNAL PROBLEM ON THE ALIM
29.00.11 11 This error occurs when the output
BOARD
associated to relay KSTB2 is activated,
the voltage reading L24MAF is lower
than 8V and the voltage reading of 24M
output is activated.
DEFAULT ON OUTPUT OF 24M:
L24MAF and FF1
29.00.12 12 This error occurs when the output
BOARD
associated to relay KSTB2 is activated,
the voltage reading L24MAF is higher
than 8V and the voltage reading of 24M
output is activated.
DEFAULT OF SIGNALS:
L24MAF and FF1
This error occurs when the output
29.00.13 13 BOARD
associated to relay KSTB2 is
deactivated, the voltage reading
L24MAF is lower than 8V and the
voltage reading of 24M output is
activated.
DEFAULT OF SIGNALS:
L24MAF and FF1
This error occurs when the output BOARD:
29.00.14 14
associated to relay KSTB2 is Failure of F24M fuse
deactivated, the voltage reading
L24MAF is higher than 8V and the
voltage reading of 24M output is
deactivated.
FAILURE OF BATTERY VOLTAGE
READING:
KUPS2, KUPS3 or any voltage readings
(24B, 24FA, 24MAF)
29.00.15 15 BOARD
When the outputs associated to relays
KUPS2 and KUPS3 are deactivated, the
reading 24MAF shall coincide with
battery reading. Otherwise, this error is
generated.
V101 - 03/2017 185/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ERROR CODE
NUMBER LED FLASHING
READING:
KUPS2, KUPS3 or any voltage readings
(24B, 24FA, 24MAF).
29.00.16 16
When the outputs associated to relays BOARD
KUPS2 and KUPS3 are activated, the
reading 24MAF shall coincide with the
power source reading. Otherwise, this
error is generated.
READING:
KUPS2, KUPS3 or any voltage reading
(24B, 24FA, 24MAF).
BOARD:
29.00.17 17 - KUPS2 or KUPS3 relays
If one of KUPS2 or KUPS3 output is
- 24B, 24FA or 24MAF voltage
activated, but the other is not, readings
readings
of power source, batteries and 24MAF
shall be same. Otherwise, this error is
generated.
READING: INTERNAL PROBLEM ON THE ALIM
BOARD:
29.00.18 18
Even if the output associated to relay - K24B relay
K24B is deactivated, the board reads - Reading of battery voltage
there is battery voltage.
THE PROBLEM IS OUT FROM THE
ALIM BOARD:
DEFAULT ON OUTPUT OF 24M: - SIO selector on command
Incoherence between the output and panel
the Reading of 24M - Auxiliary contact of SMAIN
29.00.31 31
The output associated to 24M reading is INTERNAL PROBLEM ON THE ALIM
activated but the output is not. BOARD:
- 24M reading

ALIM BOARD:
- SIO selector on command
DEFAULT OF POWER SUPPLIES: panel
Incoherence between power supplies - Internal problem on the MCB
24M and 24H board
29.00.32 32 - Voltage on shaft CAN
At physical level, MCB board presence is
detected (24M reading input), but not INTERNAL PROBLEM ON THE ALIM
at logical level (CAN-H communication). BOARD:
- 24M terminal of XALCAN
- 24M reading
- Power supply of shaft CAN
DEFAULT OF POWER SUPPLES:
ALIM BOARD:
Incoherence between power supplies
24M and 24H
panel
29.00.33 33
At logical level MCB board presence is
detected (CAN-H communication) but
BOARD:
not at physical level (24M reading
- 24M terminal of XALCAN
input).
- 24M reading
DEFAULT ON RELAY KSTB1
BOARD:
29.00.41 41 The 110 Vac of safety chain are
- KSTB1 relay
detected when the output for KSTB1
- Power supply of KSTB1 relay
relay is deactivated.
V101 - 03/2017 186/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ERROR CODE
NUMBER LED FLASHING
ALIM BOARD:
- F110 fuse
- F220 fuse
- Problem in T phase wiring: T
DEFAULT OF POWER SUPPLIES:
phase wiring to ALIM is not
Incoherence between the phase T
the same as the safety chain
power supply and the safety chain’s one
phase
29.00.42 42 - SIO selector on command
When the outputs associated to KUPS1
panel
and KSTB1 relays are activated, T
- SASE board
phase is detected, but the 110 Vac of
the safety chain are not.
BOARD
- XALTRM connector
- T phase reading, KUPS1 or
KSTB1
ALIM BOARD:
- Problem in T phase wiring: T
phase wiring to ALIM is not
Incoherence between the phase T
the same as the safety chain
power supply and the safety chain’s one
phase
29.00.43 43 - SIO selector on command
When the outputs associated to KUPS1
panel
and KSTB1 are activated, T phase is not
detected, but the 110 Vac of the safety
chain are.
BOARD
- T phase reading, KUPS1 or
KSTB1
DEFAULT OF POWER SUPPLIES: THE PROBLEM IS OUT FROM THE
Incoherence between the phase T ALIM BOARD:
power supply and the safety chain’s one - The DC/AC converter is
activated when it should not.
29.00.44 44 When the outputs associated to KUPS1
and KRES relays are deactivated and INTERNAL PROBLEM ON THE ALIM
the output associated to KSTB1 relay is BOARD:
activated, the 110 Vac of the safety - Inappropriate state of KRES,
chain are detected. KUPS1 or KSTB1 relay.
ALIM BOARD:
DEFAULT OF POWER SUPPLIES: - F110 fuse
Incoherence between the phase T - F220 fuse
power supply and the safety chain’s one - The DC/AC converter is
activated when it should not.
29.00.45 45 When the output associated to KUPS1 - SIO selector on command
relay is deactivated and the outputs panel
associated to KSTB1 and KRES relays
are activated, the 110 Vac of the safety INTERNAL PROBLEM ON THE ALIM
chain are not detected. BOARD:
- Inappropriate state of KRES,
KUPS1 or KSTB1 relay.
ALIM BOARD:
- Batteries not connected or
defective
- F24B fuse
- FB fuse
- Fuse of DC/AC converter
DEFAULT OF BATTERY CHARGER:
29.00.51 51 - 24 Vdc output of DC/AC
Defective connection of batteries
converter (XDCAC1
connector)

BOARD:
- K24B relay
- Reading of battery voltage
The module of charge is properly
BATTERY CHARGER: supplying voltage/current, but the
29.00.52 52
Batteries OK but without charge enough battery voltage still remains lower
than 25 Vdc.
V101 - 03/2017 187/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ERROR CODE
NUMBER LED FLASHING
ALIM BOARD:
DEFAULT OF BATTERY CHARGER: - Defective batteries
29.00.53 53
Error of charger temperature
BOARD
ALIM BOARD:
DEFAULT OF BATTERY CHARGER: - Defective batteries
29.00.54 54
Error of current
BOARD
ALIM BOARD:
- FRM fuse
- There is no car motion
DEFAULT OF THE MANUAL RESCUE: (balanced load, low
The accelerometer of the auxiliary performance of the
29.00.61 61
circuit detects that the car speed zero installation, car mechanically
during the manual rescue locked, etc.)
- The brake does not open
- The accelerometer of the
auxiliary circuit is not
calibrated.
DEFAULT OF THE MANUAL RESCUE: ALIM BOARD:
The accelerometer of the auxiliary - Phase(s) of motor not
29.00.62 62 circuit detects that there is a car connected
overspeed of the car during the manual - The accelerometer of the
rescue auxiliary circuit is not
calibrated
ALIM BOARD:
ACCELEROMETER DEFAULT:
29.00.63 63 - The accelerometer of the
Accelerometer not calibrated
auxiliary circuit is not
calibrated
DEFAULT OF THE MANUAL RESCUE:
Default voltage during the manual
rescue
While performing the manual rescue
operation started with mains voltage,
ALIM BOARD:
29.00.64 64 the latter disappeared.
Mains voltage disappeared during the
This error is transitory. Shift SIO to RES
manual rescue operation.
position and take it back to RUN. In the
event the mains voltage is not
recovered when the rescue starts, the
batteries will be used.
DEFAULT OF THE AUTOMATIC RESCUE:
ALIM BOARD:
29.00.65 65 The maximum time for starting the
- The automatic rescue is not
automatic rescue is exceeded.
set on the inverter.
ALIM BOARD:
- The controller detected a
29.00.66 66 Automatic rescue interrupted by the
failure avoiding the rescue:
controller
check the controller errors
on the console
ALIM BOARD:
- Terminating resistors of shaft
BUS (CAN-H)
- MCB board
29.00.67 67 Connection lost between MCB and ALIM
- Communications on CAN-H
boards
BOARD:
- XALCAN connector
V101 - 03/2017 188/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ERROR CODE
NUMBER LED FLASHING
Maximum time for the completion of the
automatic rescue exceeded THE PROBLEM IS OUT FROM THE
ALIM BOARD:
29.00.68 68
The time stated for the controller Check the controller errors on the
informing about the rescue completion console
is exceeded and the controller did not
inform about the completion.
ALIM BOARD:
- Problem of wiring: the power
supplied to the power source
is different from the T phase.
DEFAULT OF POWER SUPPLIES: - Obsolete wiring version.
29.00.71 71 When there is no T phase, the power - EMI filter (power)
source is read.
BOARD:
- Voltage reading of T phase
- Voltage reading of the power
source
ALIM BOARD:
- Power source
- EMI filter(power)
- Problem of wiring: the power
supplied to the power source
is different from the T phase
29.00.72 72 When there is T phase, the power
and it is not present.
source is not read.
BOARD:
- Voltage reading of T phase
- Voltage reading of the power
source
ALIM BOARD:
panel
- Wiring between the
DEFAULT OF THE MANUAL RESCUE: command panel and the
29.00.81 81 When RES and RUN are activated, the connector XAL24 of ALIM
input for reading 24M is also activated. board

BOARD:
- Reading of RES, RUN or 24M
inputs
ALIM BOARD:
panel
DEFAULT OF THE MANUAL RESCUE: command panel and the
29.00.82 82 When RES and RUN are activated, the connector XAL24 of ALIM
input for reading 24M is also activated. board

BOARD:
inputs
V101 - 03/2017 189/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ERROR CODE
NUMBER LED FLASHING
ALIM BOARD:
panel
command panel and the
RUN is activated but RES is not. In
29.00.83 83 connector XAL24 of ALIM
addition, the input for reading 24M is
board
also activated.
BOARD:
- Reading of inputs RES, RUN
or 24M
ALIM BOARD:
panel
command panel and the
29.00.84 84 connector XAL24 of ALIM
RUN is activated when RES is not.
board

BOARD:
inputs
ALIM BOARD:
DEFAULT OF COMMUNICATIONS: - XALCAN connector
29.00.91 91
Default on the auxiliary BUS (CAN-A) - Terminating resistors of
auxiliary BUS (CAN-A)
- REV-A circuit off or defective
ALIM BOARD:
ACCELEROMETER DEFAULT:
- XALCAN connector
29.00.92 92 Accelerometer of auxiliary circuit not
- Terminating resistors of
detected
auxiliary (CAN-A)
- REV-A circuit off or defective
V101 - 03/2017 190/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

12.2 Controller errors

MP ecoGO controller is designed according to Standard EN 627:1995 about “Specification for data logging and
monitoring of lifts”. In this standard, incidents in installations are grouped into 3 categories, Faults, Alarms and
Events: a different code number is assigned to each of them depending on its nature. This code is made of 4 digits
where the 2 first digits identify the family and the 2 last ones bring more detail about the incident type.
However, for installation faults, MP ecoGO carries the identification a step further, by adding to the incident code
the initial F (fault) and 2 digits more at the end of the code in order to better define and locate with more accuracy
the occurred fault. Any fault logging consists of the initial F followed by 2 blocks of 2 digits + 1 block of 2 or 3
digits (F xx xx xx or F xx xx xxx) corresponding to the 3 following levels:
2 first digits for the fault family code, meaning:

01 = Interruption of safety chain
02 = Opening in the circuit of door closing while moving
03 = Fault in normal sequence of door closing
04 = Car stopped out of door unlocking area
05 = Call button stuck
06 = Lift does not start
07 = Low voltage in logic electrical supply
08 = Non assigned
09 = Fault of auto-check procedure
10 = Maximum travel time exceeded
11 = Position lost
12 = Temperature out of range in machine room
13 = Fault in the normal sequence of door opening
2 digits after to identify the fault
2 or 3 last digits to better define/locate with more accuracy the fault (sub-fault)
FAULT: 01.02.00 One contact of the safety chain is open
POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION

The safety chain is opened upstream
Check that the safety chain is closed.
to point 40.
FAULT: 01.03.00 Car parked after detecting a fault 0102** (only for hydraulic lifts)

After an opening upstream to point
40, if the safety chain went close
again, the car would remain parked In hydraulic lift, after a fault 0102** occurs and the safety chain is
at bottom floor, with closed doors restored, the controller shall be reset.
and the lift would be out of order,
displaying 0103**.
FAULT: 01.09.00 110 Vs power supply default

There is a lack of 110 Vs at SASE
Check the fuse of the ALIM board.
board.
FAULT: 01.20.00 Contact of overspeed governor active

A car movement at a speed
exceeding the speed limit for that Check the car balancing and the governor contact.
installation has been detected.
V101 - 03/2017 191/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 01.29.00 Unintended car movements

An unintended car movement has
been detected. The car crosses the
whole door unlocking zone with open
doors and without stopping at
landing level.
FAULT: 01.30.00 Fault in the monitoring system for installations in compliance with EN 81-1/2+A3

The inverter informed the controller
that there is a fault in the monitoring Check the circuit and the brake contacts.
circuit of brakes.
FAULT: 02.06.00 Landing door contact open while the car is moving

During the car movement, an
opening in the door safety chain has
been detected (point 60H).
FAULT: 02.07.00 Safety chain of locks open while the car is moving

During the car movement, an
opening in the lock safety chain has
been detected (point 80H).
FAULT: 03.05.00 Repeated failures in safety chain related to the car door

The closure of the door lock contact
has not been detected, 90C, after
Check the door operator is working properly.
repeated attempts to close the
doors.
FAULT: 03.55.00 Bypassed contacts of the landing door locks or of car door in the safety chain

The switching of the lock contacts,
points 70-80-90 in the safety chain,
is not detected after the first time Check the proper operation of the door operator and also check there is
the car is dispatched to the lowest bypass between points 70-80-90.
landing or after exiting the
inspection mode.
FAULT: 04.01.00 Car stopped out of the safety area

After a trip, the car stopped out of
the safety area.
FAULT: 04.02.00 Car stopped out of the landing level

After a trip, the car stopped out of
the landing level.
V101 - 03/2017 192/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 06.04.00 Stuck contactor

In a situation of car parked with
doors open, there is a lack of voltage Check the contactors are deactivated.
at terminal KP.
FAULT: 06.18.00 Inverter fault. CONTACTORS

If the contactors do not get
activated, after a run command, the
controller understands that the
Check the communication between the inverter and MCB board, as well as
inverter is not working properly. In
the proper functioning of contactors.
this case, the controller aborts the
run command and it tries again after
a few seconds.
FAULT: 06.18.01 Inverter fault. CURRENT SENSORS

At least one of the current sensors is
not working properly anymore.
FAULT: 06.18.02 Inverter fault. OVERCURRENT

The working situation detected is
that the instantaneous current
Check the motor parameters, the proper functioning of the encoder and
consumption of the motor is greater
contactors.
than maximum current provided by
the device.
FAULT: 06.18.03 Inverter fault. THE VOLTAGE OF CAPACITORS IS HIGH

The maximum voltage allowed for
capacitors is exceeded, either in the Check the brake resistor.
idle state, or in operation.
FAULT: 06.18.04 Inverter fault. THE VOLTAGE OF CAPACITORS IS LOW

When operating in NORMAL mode, it
Check the input voltage of the inverter. The minimum voltage levels of
means that the voltage of capacitors
capacitors are the following:
is lower than the minimum voltage
400 Vac:
tolerated by the device, either in the
- 471 VDC stopped;
idle state, or in operation.
- 423 VDC running.
When operating in AUTOMATIC
230 Vac:
RESCUE mode, it means that the
- 235 VDC stopped;
single-phase voltage of input (220
- 208 VDC running.
VAC) is below 185 VDC.
FAULT: 06.18.05 Inverter fault. SIN/COS ENCODER

The electrical levels of the sin/cos
encoder are not right.
V101 - 03/2017 193/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 06.18.06 Inverter fault. MOTOR BLOCKED
POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTION

1. The motor does not turn because
the device provided the maximum
current for 6 seconds (synchronous
and asynchronous). Check the motor parameters, the proper functioning of the encoder, check
2. The motor does not turn because that the car can move (without mechanical friction), the car balancing and
the machine speed is below the the proper operation of the brake circuit.
instantaneous speed or it is zero
(only if “Overspeed percentage” >
0).
FAULT: 06.18.07 Inverter fault. BYPASS C1-C2 OPEN. PRELOAD RELAY OPEN

The bypass C1/C2 is made through
the main contacts of K1 and K2
contactors, in such a way that C1
and C2 are bypassed as long as
energy is supplied to the machine.
Otherwise, when the machine is

stopped, the bypass C1/C2 remains
open.
This error occurs when the inverter

detects the opening of the bypass
C1/C2 while it is supplying power to
the machine.
In order to protect the load resistors,

the invertor will send to the
controller the error sub-code 07.
FAULT: 06.18.08 Inverter fault. SHORT-CIRCUIT

A short-circuit has been detected in
the output to the motor (U, V, W) or
in the brake resistor.
FAULT: 06.18.09 Inverter fault. OVERTEMPERATURE IN THE MODULE

The over-temperature is due to a
situation of high rate work, with long Unlike the other faults, this one remains until the inverter cooling. Wait
phases of approach speed and a high until it disappears.
ambient temperature.
FAULT: 06.18.11 Inverter fault. PARAMETERS

There is a fault of parameters or in
the table of parameters.
V101 - 03/2017 194/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 06.18.14 Inverter fault. CONTACTORS

The contactors did not close or they
opened during a service, the
contactors K1 and K2 were
deactivated in a not provided
manner.
FAULT: 06.18.15 Inverter fault. FAULT WHEN STARTING

A starting at speed 0 has been
commanded and the position control
of the inverter is disabled.
FAULT: 06.18.16 Inverter fault. MOTOR
El motor is not connected. Check the motor connection.
FAULT: 06.18.17 Inverter fault. OVERSPEED

The car exceeded the speed limit
determined at the parameter Check the motor parameters, the proper functioning of the encoder and the
“overspeed percentage” (Id 32259) car balancing.
(setting of speed monitoring).
FAULT: 06.18.19 Inverter fault. UNSTABLE VOLTAGE OF CAPACITORS

Capacitor fault or the mains voltage
is low and/or unstable at the
beginning of a service.
It can also happen when the brake
resistor connection is poor.
FAULT: 06.18.20 Inverter fault. MOTION IN REVERSE DIRECTION

The car moves in the opposite Check the motor parameters, the proper functioning of the encoder and the
direction of the required one. car balancing.
FAULT: 06.18.22 Inverter fault. IMPROPER STATE OF CONTACTORS

The contactors are closed while the
inverter is stopped.
FAULT: 06.18.24 Inverter fault. BRAKE MICROCONTACTS

The brake should be closed, but it is
open, according to the reading of the
brake micro contacts.
V101 - 03/2017 195/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 06.18.25 Inverter fault. BRAKE MICROCONTACTS

The brake should be open, but it is
closed, according to the reading of
the brake micro contacts.
FAULT: 06.18.33-
Inverter fault. EMC
41
Electromagnetic noise that might
cause any kind of malfunctioning in After registering the corresponding fault, the inverter will reset. The sub-
the device has been detected. code fault identifies the cause.
FAULT: 06.18.64 Inverter fault. POWER and DRIVE BOARDS

Fault of connection between the
Check the connection between these boards.
boards POWER and DRIVE.
FAULT: 06.18.80 Inverter fault. ROTOR SLIP

A rotor movement has been detected
while the brake is mechanically
closed.
FAULT: 06.18.81 Inverter fault. ABSOLUTE ENCODER. POSITION

When starting, before activating the
output of contactors, the inverter
carries out a reading of the absolute
position. If it is wrong, this fault
occurs.
FAULT: 06.18.82 Inverter fault. ABSOLUTE ENCODER. COMMUNICATION

Any error in the communication
inverter/absolute encoder, different
from the absolute position request
generates this fault.
FAULT: 06.18.83
Inverter fault. TYPE OF ENCODER
-84 -85 -86 -87
The type of encoder is not the right
one. When an autotuning is carried
out, the type of inverter is checked
and the encoder integrity is tested.
If the inverter is not the proper one
or if the test of integrity is not
successful, it will display a fault code
between 53 and 57, both included.
V101 - 03/2017 196/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 06.18.88 Inverter fault. NUMBER OF PULSES/REVOLUTION OF THE ENCODER

The number of pulses per revolution
of the encoder is different from the
value set to the corresponding
parameter (Id 34048).
When an autotuning is carried out,
the number of pulses per revolution
of the encoder is checked. If the
obtained number is different from
the value set to parameter the
corresponding parameter (Id
34048), this fault will appear.
FAULT: 06.18.89 Inverter fault. ABSOLUTE ENCODER

There is no communication with the
encoder.
FAULT: 06.18.98 Inverter fault. CONFLICT OF COMMANDS

The autotuning and the rescue
operation cannot be carried out at
the same time. It is intended to
carry out the autotuning while the
rescue signal is activated.
FAULT: 06.18.112 Inverter fault. SHAFT MAP

The map of shaft has not been no
initialised
FAULT: 06.18.113 Inverter fault. POSITION RESET /AUTOLEARNING

The position reset process or
autolearning has been aborted.
FAULT: 06.18.114 Inverter fault. ROTOR POSITION

The rotor moved while the inverter
was switched off.
FAULT: 06.18.115 Inverter fault. LEVEL POSITION OFFSET

It is not possible to readjust the car
Check the position of the magnets and run the procedure of the positioning
position as the diversion is greater
system learning.
than 5 cm.
FAULT: 06.18.116 Inverter fault. SAFETY AREA POSITION OFFSET

It is not possible to readjust the car
Check the position of the magnets and run the procedure of the positioning
position as the diversion is greater
system learning.
than 200 cm.
V101 - 03/2017 197/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 06.18.117 Inverter fault. DESTINATION POSITION NOT VALID

During a motion, the car has been
ordered to stop at a destination
which has already been overpassed.
FAULT: 06.18.118 Inverter fault. DESTINATION POSITION

The car entered the brake area of
the top or bottom level and no stop
command has been given.
FAULT: 06.18.119 Inverter fault. DESTINATION POSITION

The brake distance required by the
car is greater than the distance left
up to next destination.
FAULT: 06.18.120 Inverter fault. WRONG DESTINATION POSITION

The car received a destination
position located out of the travel
range.
FAULT: 06.18.121 Inverter fault. WRONG POSITION

The car position received by the
controller is out of the travel range.
FAULT: 06.18.122 Inverter fault. DIRECTION COMMAND

The inverter receives a direction
command which is not valid.
FAULT: 06.18.123 Inverter fault. WRONG DIRECTION

The car received the command for
moving up when it was at the top
floor or for moving down when it was
at the bottom floor.
FAULT: 06.18.124 Inverter fault. WRONG SPEED COMMAND

The inverter receives a speed
command which is not valid.
FAULT: 06.18.125 Inverter fault. Inverter fault. SHAFT MAP
The shaft map has not been loaded.
V101 - 03/2017 198/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 06.18.126 Inverter fault. Inverter fault. SHAFT MAP

There are data discrepancies
between the inverter parameters,
the pulley diameter and the
suspension and shaft data received
by the controller.
FAULT: 06.18.127 Inverter fault. COMMUNICATION WITH REV BOARD MISSING

The inverter does not receive
information from the REV board via
the communication circuit
FAULT: 06.18.144 Inverter fault. THERMAL PROBE

There is an over-temperature in the
motor.
FAULT: 06.18.160 Inverter fault. AUTOTUNING

Interruption of the autotuning
procedure: the run command has
been deactivated before the
completion of the autotuning
procedure.

Fault in the reading of the absolute
position: when the autotuning
procedure has been completed, a
second reading of the absolute
position is carried out. If any
problem occurs during the reading,
the inverter will display this fault.

The initial and final absolute
positions are the same: the machine
pulley remained immobile.

Error in the setting of the absolute
encoder: the parameters for the
adjustment of the absolute encoder
are not valid.
V101 - 03/2017 199/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


Error of sine encoder: Wrong reading
or no reading of one of the two
channels of the sine encoder.

Error in the setting of the sine
encoder: the values for the
adjustment of the sine encoder are
not valid.

Improper number of machine poles:
the number of poles determined by
the autotuning procedure is wrong.

Error in the setting of the directions:
the value for the adjustment of
parameter “Sine encoder features”
(Id 35595) is wrong.

Error in the calculation of the
resistance of the motor phase: the
value of the phase resistance
determined by the inverter is wrong
or out of range.

The autotuning procedure took more
than two minutes.
FAULT: 06.18.177 Inverter fault. WRONG PASSWORD

The password to access the
parameter menu is wrong.

The inverter is set for the control of
synchronous motors and no sine
incremental encoder has been set.
V101 - 03/2017 200/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


Absolute encoder not configured: a
synchronous motor cannot be
controlled without an absolute
encoder.

The encoder setting is wrong: the
number of pulses per rotation of the
encoder is wrong.

The control mode activated is not
compatible with an asynchronous
machine.

The parameter “Speed at which the
inverter shifts from speed control to
position control” is wrong.

To be able to use the specified
encoder at the specified speed, the
advanced algorithm of speed shall be
activated.
FAULT: 06.18.208 Inverter fault. ADJUSTMENT OF SENSORS

1 Check the mains power wiring from the inverter output (U - V - W) up to
the motor terminals.
Error of time-out in the procedure of
2. Check the good condition of the motor, by measuring the resistance
sensor adjustment: the procedure
between phases.
took more than three minutes.
3. Check the current sensors by displaying, in the idle state, their values in
digital units.

1. Check the mains power wiring from the inverter output (U - V - W) up to
During the procedure of sensor the motor terminals.
adjustment, the maximum number 2. Check the good condition of the motor, by measuring the resistance
of attempts exceeded has been between phases.
exceeded: the five attempts fixed for 3. Check the current sensors by displaying, in the idle state, their values in
the adjustment have been exceeded. digital units.
4. Ensure that the voltage of capacitors remains stable.
V101 - 03/2017 201/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


The adjustment procedure has been
aborted by the user. The motion
command has been deactivated
before the procedure completion.
FAULT: 06.18.240 Inverter fault. POSITION RESET

The procedure of position reset has
been aborted.
FAULT: 06.18.241 Inverter fault. LEARNING OF POSITIONING SYSTEM

The procedure of the positioning
system’s autolearning has been
aborted.
FAULT: 06.18.243 Inverter fault. MAGNETS

The procedure of position reset
detected that there are magnets
missing or their arrangement is
wrong.
FAULT: 06.18.244 Inverter fault. INCONSISTENT COMMAND OF DOWNWARD MOTION

While the car is at the bottom
landing, it receives the order to
move downwards.
FAULT: 06.18.245 Inverter fault. INCONSISTENT COMMAND OF UPWARD MOTION

While the car is at the top landing, it
receives the order to move upwards.
FAULT: 06.18.248 Inverter fault. COMMUNICATION

There is no communication between
the inverter and the connection box.
FAULT: 06.18.249 Inverter fault. SHAFT DATA

There is an error in the check of
shaft data.
The shaft data are not initialised.
V101 - 03/2017 202/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN


There is a discrepancy between the When this fault appears, a procedure of positioning system’s auto-learning
parameters and lift model. shall be carried out.

There is an error in the check of the When this fault appears, a procedure of positioning system’s auto-learning
shaft map. shall be carried out.

When this fault appears, a procedure of positioning system’s auto-learning
The shaft map is not initialised.
shall be carried out.

There is an error in the shaft map When this fault appears, a procedure of positioning system’s auto-learning
storage. shall be carried out.

There is an error in the shaft map
storage.
FAULT: 06.20.00 Fault in manual reset

If the controller is configured with
manual reset (parameter “Manual
Reset” set 1 or 2 values), this fault
will appear when the controller is The reset will only be possible after shifting into inspection mode.
reset by means of switching OFF and
ON after a fault which not allows an
automatic reset occurred.
FAULT: 06.34.00 Stuck contact in up/down pushbuttons of the inspection box

The UP and DOWN pushbuttons
carry out two functions: on one
hand, they inform the controller
about the motion direction and, on
the other hand, they bypass the
safety chain to allow the car motion.
This fault informs that the contact
associated to the safety chain by-
pass is OFF.
FAULT: 07.01.00 Short circuit in 24 VDC-circuit of shaft

There is a short circuit in some
element connected to the shaft bus.
V101 - 03/2017 203/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 07.02.00 Short circuit in 24 VDC-circuit of car

element connected to the car bus.
FAULT: 07.03.00 Short circuit in 24 VDC-circuit of drive unit

element connected to the drive unit
bus.
FAULT: 07.04.00 Over-voltage in 24 VDC-circuit of shaft

There is an over-voltage in the shaft
bus.
FAULT: 07.05.00 Over-voltage in 24 VDC-circuit of car

There is an over-voltage in the car
bus.
FAULT: 07.06.00 Over-voltage in 24 VDC-circuit of drive unit

There is an over-voltage in the drive
unit bus.
FAULT : 07.07.00 Batteries are not connected
POSSIBLE CAUSES SOLUTIONS

1. The batteries are disconnected 1. Check the connection of batteries
2. The fuse F24B (in ALIM board) is
2. Replace the fuse
blown
3. The fuse F24B (in the ALIM
3. Replace the ALIM board
board) still blows after replacement
4. The fuse FBC40 (link of batteries)
4. Replace the fuse
is blown
FAULT: 07.07.01 The battery charging is not enough

The level of the battery charging is
Charge the batteries
not enough
FAULT: 07.07.02 Ambient temperature out of range

The ambient temperature is out of
Request for support from MP staff to get the temperature adjusted
the allowed range
FAULT: 07.07.03 Battery current exceeded

Failure in the circuit for charging the
Replace the ALIM board
ALIM board
V101 - 03/2017 204/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

ERROR: 07.07.04 The power supply of 24V DC does not exist in the auxiliary circuit

1. Failure of relays KUPS2 and
1. Replace the ALIM board
KUPS3 of the ALIM board
2. Failure of the 24 VDC power
2. Replace the power source
source in the electrical cabinet
3. Failure of SIO switch on the
3. Replace the command panel
command panel
4. Wrong connection of connector
4. Check the connection
XALDA of the ALIM board
FAULT: 07.07.05 Automatic or manual rescue activated

Wait for the completion or check that the SIO switch on the command panel
A rescue operation is in progress
is not on RES position
The sum of the values of the three circuits, 24 Vdc for shaft, controller and drive unit
FAULT: 07.08.00
exceeds 5.5 amps
Saturation of 24M, 24H and 24GT
One of the elements connected to the 24 Vdc line is saturating the line.
lines
FAULT: 09.01.01 Fault of internal storage. PARAMETERS
The parameter values are damaged.
FAULT: 09.01.02 Fault of internal storage. SHAFT MAP
The shaft map values are damaged.
FAULT: 09.01.03 Fault of internal storage. FAULTS
The error codes are damaged.
FAULT: 09.01.04 Fault of internal storage. BOARD IDENTIFICATION

The board identification code is
damaged.
FAULT:
Board internal fault
09.40.Board id No.
Defective board. It shall be repaired.
FAULT: 10.01.00 Travel maximum time exceeded

The time set to parameter “Travel
maximum time” has been exceeded.
V101 - 03/2017 205/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 11.01.00 Fault in the positioning system. LEARNING

The procedure of positioning
system’s auto-learning has been
cancelled due to a fault in the
inverter.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. LEVEL MAGNET
11.04.Level No.
The level displayed in sub-fault code

informs that the magnet is
improperly located with regard to
the right position it should have.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. SAFETY AREA MAGNET
11.05.Area No.
The safety area displayed in sub-

fault code informs that the magnet is
improperly located with regard to
the right position it should have.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. LEVEL MAGNET
11.06.Level No.
The level magnet is not of the right
Correct the length: it should be 100 mm ± 10%
length.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. SAFETY AREA MAGNET
11.07.Area No.
The safety area magnet is not of the
Correct the length: it should be 400 mm ±10%
right length.
FAULT: 11.08.00 Fault in the positioning system. MAGNETS OF BOTTOM LEVEL

The lower part of the level magnet
and the safety area magnet’s one, at Correct the alignment.
the bottom floor, are not aligned.
FAULT: 11.09.00 Fault in the positioning system. MAGNETS OF TOP LEVEL

The upper part of the level magnet
and the safety area magnet’s one, at Correct the alignment.
the bottom floor, are not aligned.
FAULT: 11.10.00 Fault in the positioning system. ENTERING THE “POSITION RESET” MODE

An error occurred during the
Check that the inverter and door contacts are right.
controller reset procedure
V101 - 03/2017 206/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 11.11.00 Fault in the positioning system. OFFSET POSITION

The actual car position real does not
coincides with the position the
controller has.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. INCONSISTENCY BETWEEN No. of STOPS & No. of MAGNETS
11.12.Level No.
The number of level magnets read is
different from the number of stops in
the installation.
FAULT: 11.13.00 Fault in shaft map

The registering of the shaft map in
the system memory has been
impossible.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. POLARITY OF LEVEL MAGNET
11.14.Level No.
The magnet polarity of the displayed
level is wrong.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. POLARITY OF SAFETY AREA MAGNET
11.15.Area No.
The magnet polarity of the displayed
safety area is wrong.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. THERE IS NO LEVEL MAGNET
11.16.Level No.
There is no level magnet at the level
displayed in the sub-fault code.
FAULT:
Fault in the positioning system. THERE IS NO SAFETY AREA MAGNET
11.17.Area No.
There is no safety area magnet at
the level displayed in the sub-fault
code.
FAULT: 11.18.00 Fault in the positioning system. WRONG POLARITY AT BOTTOM LEVEL

The polarity of magnet for level or
Change the magnet polarity frim North to South.
safety area at bottom level is not the
Check that the installation is provided with all the required magnets for
right one.
level and safety area.
There is no level magnet.
V101 - 03/2017 207/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 11.19.00 Fault in the positioning system. WRONG POLARITY AT TOP LEVEL

The polarity of magnet for level or
Change the magnet polarity frim North to South.
safety area at top level is not the
Check that the installation is provided with all the required magnets for
right one.
level and safety area.
There is no level magnet.
FAULT: 11.20.01 The car cannot move

The time set for the car starting is
Check the doors are closed.
over and it does not move.
FAULT: 11.20.02 The car cannot move

The time set for the car starting is
Check the inverter is free of faults.
over and it does not move.
FAULT: 11.21.01 Procedure of positioning system’s learning. THE INVERTER DOES NOT RESPOND

The command to carry out the
procedure of positioning system’s
auto-learning has been triggered
from the console, but the inverter
does not respond.
FAULT: 11.58.00 Fault in the positioning system. CAR POSITION
The car position is wrong.
FAULT: 12.45.00 Over temperature in the motor
The motor temperature is too high.
FAULT: 12.46.00 Temperature out of range in the machine room

The machine room temperature is
out of the range set to the
corresponding parameter.
FAULT: 13.01.01 Levelling system

After the landing approach
procedure starts, the contactors are
deactivated.
V101 - 03/2017 208/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 13.11.00 Door safety chain opened for too long

Door safety chain opened for too
much time (point 60H) for longer
than 3 minutes.
FAULT: 13.12.00 Door re-opening safety circuit activated for too long

The door re-opening pushbutton,
photocell or sensitivity is activated
for longer than the time that has
been set.
FAULT: 13.20.00 Fault of photocell. The state of the photocell of landing no. 1 does not change

1. The setting of the operation logic
1. Check that the el microswitch 3 of the DOC board is ON.
is wrong
2. The setting of controller
2. Check that the parameter ID. 42 is set to value YES.
parameters is wrong
3. Check the connection. If ii is OK, check that the controller receives the
3. The photocell is not no connected
signals by means of the console tool or PC.
4. The photocell is damaged 4. Change the photocell.

is wrong
parameters is wrong

is wrong
parameters is wrong
FAULT: 25.01.01 Fault in LINK board. SIM CARD INCORRECTLY INSERTED

The SIM card is not properly inserted
Ensure the SIM card is properly inserted.
into its socket.
FAULT: 25.01.02 Fault in LINK board. NON VALID SIM CARD

The card inserted into the LINK board shall be provided by MP for a
The SIM card inserted does not
proper operation.
correspond to mobile phone operator
If it is a non-MP SIM card, you shall confirm with MP the required
authorized by MP.
features for this card.
V101 - 03/2017 209/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 25.01.03 Fault in LINK board. WRONG PIN CODE OF THE SIM CARD

The PIN safety code to access the
Set the parameter “Code PIN” with the right number.
SIM is wrong.
FAULT: 25.01.04 Fault in LINK board. MODULE GSM/GPRS NON-DETECTED

The modem GSM/GPRS does not
The LINK board shall be replaced.
respond.
FAULT: 25.01.05 Fault in LINK board. THE REGISTER ON THE GSM NETWORK HAS NOT BEEN POSSIBLE

Parameters APN, USER and PASS,
Check the net setting parameters.
provided by the user, are wrong.
FAULT: 25.01.06 Fault in LINK board. TEL BOARD NON-DETECTED

1. There is a default on the TEL
board that prevents its normal Check the TEL board.
operation.
2. There is a connection default in
Check the connections of the auxiliary circuit CAN.
the auxiliary circuit CAN.
FAULT: 25.01.07 Fault in LINK board. INSUFFICIENT NETWORK COVERAGE

The GSM link is not located at the Connect a higher gain antenna, provided with a connection cable harness to
appropriate place. carry out coverage tests at several points inside the controller.
FAULT: 25.01.08 Fault in LINK board. COMMUNICATION DEFAULT IN AUXILIARY CAN

Connection default in the circuit
auxiliary circuit CAN.
FAULT: 25.01.09 Fault in LINK board. COMMUNICATION DEFAULT IN AUXILIARY CAN OF GROUP OF LIFTS

Check the connections of the auxiliary circuit CAN of group of lifts.
auxiliary circuit CAN of group of lifts.
FAULT: 25.01.10 Fault in LINK board. THE AUXILIARY CAN IS OUT OF POWER

The ALIM board does not supply
power to the LINK: the LINK board
detects voltage coming out from the
Check the connections of the ALIM board.
main power of the lift (Controller
circuit), but it does detect any power
on the auxiliary circuit.
V101 - 03/2017 210/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 25.01.11 Fault in LINK board. LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH SIGMA SERVER

The SIGMA server is temporary not The LINK board will try again to connect to the server until the connection
available. is restored.
FAULT: 25.01.12 Fault in LINK board. microSD CARD INCORRECTLY INSERTED

The microSD is not properly
Ensure the microSD card is properly inserted into its socket.
inserted.
FAULT: 25.01.13 Fault in LINK board. microSD CARD WITHOUT SPACE ENOUGH

There is less space than the
recommended one for a proper
The microSD card requires at least 1 Gb-available space.
operation in the microSD card
inserted.
FAULT: 25.01.14 Fault in LINK board. microSD CARD DOES NOT RESPOND

Replace the microSD card by a new one with more than 1 Gb-capacity. The
The microSD card is damaged.
card format shall be FAT16.
FAULT: 25.01.15 Fault in LINK board. FAULT IN MANDATORY PARAMETERS

At least one mandatory parameter is
Check the LINK board parameters.
not set
FAULT: 25.01.16 Fault in LINK board. THE AUXILIARY CAN DOES NOT RECEIVE POWER SUPPLY

The ALIM board does not feed the
LINK: the LINK board detects
voltage coming from the mains
power supply of the lift (Controller Check the ALIM board connections.
circuit), but it does not detect any
power supply into the auxiliary
circuit.
FAULT: 25.01.17 LINK BOARD report. LOW BATTERY ACCORDING TO EN 81-28 REQUIREMENTS

Battery level lower than one hour of
use.
FAULT: 25.01.50 Fault in TEL board. microSD CARD INCORRECTLY INSERTED

The microSD is not properly
Ensure the microSD card is properly inserted into its socket.
inserted.
FAULT: 25.01.51 Fault in TEL board. microSD CARD DOES NOT RESPOND

Replace the microSD card by a new one with more than 1 Gb-capacity. The
The microSD card is damaged.
card format shall be FAT16.
V101 - 03/2017 211/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 25.01.52 Fault in TEL board. microSD CARD WITHOUT SPACE ENOUGH

There is less space than the
recommended one for a proper
The microSD card requires at least 100 Mb-available space.
operation in the microSD card
inserted.
FAULT: 25.01.53 Fault in TEL board. NUMBER OF FAULTS IN AUXILIARY CAN EXCEEDED

auxiliary circuit CAN.
FAULT: 25.01.54 Fault in TEL board. THE VOCODER MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND
The TEL board hardware is damaged. The TEL board shall be replaced.
FAULT: 25.01.55 Fault in TEL board. THE LIGHT SENSOR MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND
The TEL board hardware is damaged. The TEL board shall be replaced.
FAULT: 25.01.56 Fault in TEL board. PUSHBUTTON CONTACT OPEN FOR MORE THAN ONE MINUTE

The contact of the alarm pushbutton
Check the connection.
is disconnected from the CAR board.
Fault in TEL board. WRONG CONFIGURATION: MORE THAN ONE DEVICE IS ASSOCIATED TO
FAULT: 25.01.57
THE SAME IDENTIFIER IN THE AUXILIARY CAN
The microswitch 1 corresponds to the board identifier:
SW1 OFF: TEL board number 1
There are more than one TEL board
SW1 ON: TEL board number 2
in the lift with same configuration of
microswitches.
Ensure the identifiers of the TEL boards belonging to the same installation
have different value.
FAULT: 25.01.58 Fault in TEL board. FAULT OF AUDIO CIRCUIT SELF-TEST

Failure of the microphone or the
The TEL board shall be replaced.
loudspeaker.
FAULT: 26.01.59 Fault in TEL board. FAULT IN PARAMETERS

The value of at least one parameter
Check the parameters of TEL board.
is wrong.
FAULT: 26.01.60 Fault in TEL board. FAULT IN MANDATORY PARAMETERS

The value of at least one of the
Check the parameters of TEL board.
mandatory parameters is missing.
V101 - 03/2017 212/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

FAULT: 27.01.80 Fault in AUDIO board. BOARD INTERNAL ERROR

The AUDIO board hardware is
The AUDIO board shall be replaced.
damaged.
FAULT: 27.01.81 Fault in AUDIO board. FAULT IN PARAMETERS

At least one parameter value is
Check the parameters of AUDIO board.
wrong.
FAULT: 27.01.82 Fault in AUDIO board. FAULT IN MANDATORY PARAMETERS

The value of at least one of the
Check the parameters of AUDIO board.
mandatory parameters is missing.
FAULT: 28.01.83 Fault in AUDIO board. THERE ARE TOO MANY FAULTS IN AUXILIARY CAN

There is a connection default in the
Check the connections of Auxiliary CAN circuit.
Auxiliary CAN circuit.
FAULT: 28.01.84 Fault in AUDIO board. SELF-TEST DEFAULT OF THE AUDIO CIRCUIT

Default of the microphone or the
The AUDIO board shall be replaced.
loudspeaker.
Fault in AUDIO board. WRONG SETTING: MORE THAN ONE DEVICE IN THE AUXILIARY CAN
FAULT: 28.01.85
HAVE SAME IDENTIFIER.
The microswitches 1 and 2 of the AUDIO board identify the board.
More than one AUDIO board in the
lift have the same setting of
The identifier of every AUDIO board belonging to the same lift shall have a
microswitches.
different value.
FAULT: 29.00.xx Fault in ALIM board. REFER TO CHAPTER “FAULTS OF ALIM BOARD”
xx = error code
V101 - 03/2017 213/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

12.3 Causes for non-starting
CAUSES FOR NON-STARTING

AXX Involved element
A01 The transformer 110 fuse has blown.
A02 The contacts located upstream to point 60, in the safety chain, are open.
A03 The temperature of the machine or the machine room is out of range for operation.
A04 There is a car overload.
A05 The car is full.
A06 A door contact of the safety chain is open.
A07 The door-opening pushbutton is activated.
A08 The contacts of car door and landing door locks, in the safety chain, are open.
The car call pushbutton or landing door call, at the floor where the car is located, remains
A09
activated.
After a movement completion in inspection mode, the part of the safety chain corresponding
A10
to INSPECTION mode or the part of the INSPECTION command circuit did not open.
Reading of load cells located in the car or on the fixed point: they are not connected or the
A11
read value is out of range.
The maintenance safety chain is opened. From the point 40, the contacts of the safety chain
A12
are opened.
A14 In inspection mode, the controller detects that the contact of contactor remains activated.
The maximum number of travels per hour allowed has been exceeded (refer to parameter
A15
Maximum number of operations per Hour)
In inspection mode, the controller detects that the contact of the governor coil remains
A16
activated.
A17 The car photocell is activated.
A18 The input corresponding to the door operator reopening in front of an obstacle is activated.
A19 The temperature of the machine room is out of range for operation.
A21 The BYPASS contact is activated while in normal mode
The lift is operating in INSPECTION/MES mode and the controller reads that the contact of
A22
closed door is opened. (Input E2 on DOC boards)
A28 The switch of maximum pressure or minimum pressure switch is activated.
A29 There is a failure in the inverter.
A30 The battery voltage is too low to carry out a rescue.
A50 The controller does not detect the board of connections on car roof (REV).
A51 The controller does not detect the board of power supplies (ALIM).
A52 The controller does not detect the board of the inverter.
13 APPENDIX A: INFORMATION AND DATA TO BE GIVEN BY THE OWNER TO THE RESCUE SERVICE
The installation owner shall inform the rescue service about:
 The lift is porvided with an emergency telephone enabling the permanent 2-way communication with
the rescue service.
 The general instructions of the installing company (Alarm filtering in this manual).
 Energy is supplied to the alarm equipment for, at least, one hour.
 The need for setting up permanent 2-way communication so that the trapped users can be contacted,
including the possibility of talking regularly to them and informing them about the status of the
rescue operation.
 The data referring to the interfaces with the alarm system and the communication protocols.
 The periodic check-ups and automatic tests planned to be carried out and their frequencies; especially
the need to periodically check verbal response by using alarm starting device through the manual
test.
 The need for a rescue service suitable for the building’s organisation.
 Data concerning the location and access to the building as well as the lifts’ data.
The installation's owner, on their part, must keep the emergency telephone connected to an RTPC or GSM
telephone line in order to ensure the correct and full reception and identification of the call(s) by the rescue
service.
V101 - 03/2017 214/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED TO THE RESCUE SERVICE:
Emergency telephone MODEL INTEGRATED ANALOGUE
Telephone MODEL
Information on the line:
interface: Telephone no.:
Protocol: C PC P100
Manual Periodic check-ups C heck-up period: Every ______ days
Automatic Tests
C heck-up period: Every ______ days
(test call)
Rescue service required

24 hours Other: _____________
availability:
Street: Post C ode: Province:

Address of the installation
originating the alarm
Block no.:
Lift no.:
Lift's data C IR C ode (Data set by the

installer):
Location of the lift within the
building:
Name:
Authorised installer: Telephone:

Authorisation
code:
Name:
C ontact person in the
building: Telephone:
Way of Access in case of
an alarm:
Way of access to the trapped
passengers
Special risks at the building

entrance and the lifts'
acesses
Other data of interest to
access:
Remarks:
V101 - 03/2017 215/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

HEADQUARTERS
Pabellón MP
Leonardo Da Vinci, 15
Isla de la Cartuja – 41092 Seville
SPAIN
+34 902 197 277

[email protected]
www.mplifts.com
Technical Manual translated from the original in Spanish, available at MP website.

Products constantly developed, the specifications can be modified without prior notice.

Mtelecogo en 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mtelecogo en 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mtelecogo en 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical pre-wiring

Installation • Assembly • Commissioning

The smart controller

SUMMARY OF MODIFICATIONS IN REGARD WITH THE PREVIOUS VERSION:

V101 - 03/2017 2/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

V101 - 03/2017 3/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

4.3.2.1 ALIM board ...................................................................................................................... 45

V101 - 03/2017 4/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

6.5.1 Connecting point for console and PC ................................................................................ 100

V101 - 03/2017 5/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

10.1.3 Alarm filtering ................................................................................................................ 144

V101 - 03/2017 6/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

1.2 Use of the MP ecoGO (EPW1) installation

1.3 Product safety

1.4 Staff requirements

When setting up, the following must be guaranteed:

 No people or objects must remain in hazardous areas.

1.6 Electric power risks. Residual voltage

V101 - 03/2017 7/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

1.7 Modifications and operations on MP ecoGO EPW

1.8 Obligations of the Installer / Maintenance staff

V101 - 03/2017 8/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2 GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE EPW MP ecoGO

2.2 Performances of the EPW MP ecoGO

 EN 81-1, EN 81-2  EN 81-70 (optional)

V101 - 03/2017 9/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2.2.2 Main performances

2.2.2.2 Door pre-opening and pre-starting

2.2.2.3 MES, automatic rescue and assisted electro-manual rescue

2.2.2.4 Command panel for maintenance operations

2.2.2.5 Efficient control for the car lighting

2.2.2.6 Control of 2-level stand-by mode

V101 - 03/2017 10/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2.2.2.8 Audio Kit in car

2.2.2.9 MP ecoGO console

2.2.2.10 GUIA module

2.2.2.11 Software app for PC MP ecoGOTools

2.2.2.12 Car display LCD-070E de 7”

2.2.2.13 Car display TFT-070E of 7”

2.3 Installation requirements

A clear horizontal space in front of the MRL cabinet shall be provided:

V101 - 03/2017 11/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

2.3.2 Mains power supply

Number of cores x cross-section (mm2) + t (earth) EN 81 - 1 EN 81 - 20

The network frequency will be 50 or 60 Hz, depending on the local grid.

2.3.3 Earthing connection

2.3.3.2 Main equipotential bonding

2.4 Controller circuit and auxiliary circuit

V101 - 03/2017 12/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

If only FSM1 is included, T would be the only phase protected.

V101 - 03/2017 13/216 MTELecoGO_101_EN

 FA cuts all the circuits of lighting and sockets.

Electric devices for cut and protection:

R, S, T, N 230M 110Vs 24M / 24H 24A 24B

SMAIN OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

FF/QF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

F220 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON

F110 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON

FBAT OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF